Linker: Remove support for -Map= with an empty argument.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b3adc24a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
fa1477dc 34@set PDP11
2a60a7a8
AM
35@set POWERPC
36@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 37@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 38@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
39@set SPU
40@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 41@set WIN32
e0001a05 42@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
43@end ifset
44@c man end
45
9160ea82
AM
46@ifnottex
47@dircategory Software development
48@direntry
252b5132 49* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
50@end direntry
51@end ifnottex
252b5132 52
0e9517a9 53@copying
e49e529d
JM
54This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57@end ifset
58version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 59
b3adc24a 60Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 61
cf055d54 62Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 63under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
64or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 67section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 68@end copying
252b5132
RH
69@iftex
70@finalout
71@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 72@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 73@titlepage
71ba23f6 74@title The GNU linker
252b5132 75@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
76@subtitle @code{ld}
77@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79@end ifset
252b5132
RH
80@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81@author Steve Chamberlain
82@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
83@page
84
85@tex
86{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
87\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 89\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
90\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91}
92\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93@end tex
94
95@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 96@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b3adc24a 97Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 138@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
139@ifset ARM
140* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
142@ifset M68HC11
143* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
148@ifset M68K
149* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150@end ifset
833794fc
MR
151@ifset MIPS
152* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
160@ifset S/390
161* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
163@ifset SPU
164* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
166@ifset TICOFF
167* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
169@ifset WIN32
170* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
172@ifset XTENSA
173* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174@end ifset
252b5132
RH
175@end ifclear
176@ifclear SingleFormat
177* BFD:: BFD
178@end ifclear
179@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 183* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 184* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 185@end menu
84ec0e6d 186@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
187
188@node Overview
189@chapter Overview
190
191@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 193
0879a67a 194@ifset man
0285c67d 195@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 196ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
197@c man end
198
199@c man begin SEEALSO
200ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202@file{ld}.
203@c man end
204@end ifset
205
206@c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 209their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 210compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 211
ff5dcc92 212@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
213a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
0285c67d
NC
216@ifset man
217@c For the man only
ece2d90e 218This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
219@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
221@end ifset
222
252b5132 223@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
224This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
226write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229@end ifclear
230
231Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 234@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
235(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man end
238
252b5132
RH
239@node Invocation
240@chapter Invocation
241
0285c67d
NC
242@c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
ff5dcc92 244The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
245and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
0285c67d
NC
248@c man end
249
252b5132
RH
250@ifset UsesEnvVars
251@menu
a05a5b64 252* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
253* Environment:: Environment Variables
254@end menu
255
256@node Options
a05a5b64 257@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
258@end ifset
259
260@cindex command line
261@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
262
263@c man begin OPTIONS
264
252b5132
RH
265The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 268For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
269object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272@smallexample
273ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274@end smallexample
275
ff5dcc92 276This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
277result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
ff5dcc92 281Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
282point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
287occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289noted in the descriptions below.
290
291@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
292Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
296
297Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301message @samp{No input files}.
302
36f63dca 303If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
304assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
309@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
314
315For options whose names are a single letter,
316option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318option that requires them.
319
320For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 321precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 322@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 323this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 324only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
325@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327output.
328
329Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334accepted.
252b5132 335
36f63dca 336Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 337(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
338prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
340
341@smallexample
2509a395 342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
343@end smallexample
344
345This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
346silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353@smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355@end smallexample
4e53152f 356
a05a5b64 357Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
358linker:
359
ff5dcc92 360@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 361@include at-file.texi
dff70155 362
2509a395
SL
363@kindex -a @var{keyword}
364@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
365This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
7ee314fa
AM
371@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 378it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 379This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 380interface.
7ee314fa 381
252b5132
RH
382@ifclear SingleFormat
383@cindex binary input format
384@kindex -b @var{format}
385@kindex --format=@var{format}
386@cindex input format
387@cindex input format
388@item -b @var{input-format}
389@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
390@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 392@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 393that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 394configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 395to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
396default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400@xref{BFD}.
401
402You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404linking object files of different formats), by including
405@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 406particular format.
252b5132
RH
407
408The default format is taken from the environment variable
409@code{GNUTARGET}.
410@ifset UsesEnvVars
411@xref{Environment}.
412@end ifset
413You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
414@code{TARGET};
415@ifclear man
416see @ref{Format Commands}.
417@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
418@end ifclear
419
420@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422@cindex compatibility, MRI
423@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 425For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 426files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
427@ifclear man
428@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429@end ifclear
430@ifset man
431the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432@end ifset
433Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 434the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
435scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
437specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439@cindex common allocation
440@kindex -d
441@kindex -dc
442@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 443@item -d
252b5132
RH
444@itemx -dc
445@itemx -dp
446These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
7ee314fa
AM
452@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 461The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 462
abf874aa
CL
463@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473@smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492@end smallexample
493
494This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499This option enables warnings when
500@code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503output region.
504
252b5132
RH
505@cindex entry point, from command line
506@kindex -e @var{entry}
507@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 508@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
509@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
b58f81ae
DJ
518@kindex --exclude-libs
519@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 521exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
522@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527be treated as hidden.
528
e1c37eb5
DK
529@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540regardless of this option.
541
252b5132
RH
542@cindex dynamic symbol table
543@kindex -E
544@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 545@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
546@item -E
547@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
548@itemx --no-export-dynamic
549When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
558
559If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562linking the program itself.
563
55255dae 564You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 565be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 566See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 567
8b747e1a
DK
568Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
36f63dca 572@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
573@cindex big-endian objects
574@cindex endianness
575@kindex -EB
576@item -EB
577Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
578
579@cindex little-endian objects
580@kindex -EL
581@item -EL
582Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 583@end ifclear
252b5132 584
2509a395
SL
585@kindex -f @var{name}
586@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
587@item -f @var{name}
588@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
589When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
590to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
591table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
592symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
593
594If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
595run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
596the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
597first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
598@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
599in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
600Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
601implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 602machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
603
604This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
605will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
606
2509a395
SL
607@kindex -F @var{name}
608@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 609@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 610@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
611When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
612the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
613of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
614on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
615
616If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
617run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
618dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
619filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
620found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
621used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
622@var{name}.
623
ff5dcc92 624Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 625toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
626object files.
627@ifclear SingleFormat
628The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 629@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 630@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
631environment variable.
632@end ifclear
633The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
634creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 635
3dbf70a2 636@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
637@kindex -fini=@var{name}
638@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
639When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
640executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
641address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
642the function to call.
643
252b5132
RH
644@kindex -g
645@item -g
646Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
647
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -G @var{value}
649@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 650@cindex object size
2509a395 651@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
652@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
653Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
654@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 655MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
656sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
657
658@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 659@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 660@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 661@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
662@itemx -soname=@var{name}
663When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
664the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
665which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
666linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
667field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
668
669@kindex -i
670@cindex incremental link
671@item -i
672Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
673
3dbf70a2 674@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
675@kindex -init=@var{name}
676@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
677When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
678executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
679of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
680function to call.
681
252b5132 682@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 683@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 684@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 685@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
686@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
687Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
688list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
689If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 690will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 691will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 692
ff5dcc92 693On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
694files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
695and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
696called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
697@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
698indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
699to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
700@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
701
702The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
703specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
704was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
705command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
706archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
707the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
708
ff5dcc92 709See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
710archives multiple times.
711
712You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
713
714@ifset GENERIC
715This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 716if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
717behaviour of the AIX linker.
718@end ifset
719
720@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 721@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 722@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 723@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 724@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
725Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
726for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
727option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
728in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
729on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 730@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
731order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
732how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
733option is specified.
252b5132 734
3aa2d05a
NC
735If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
736prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
737@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 738
252b5132
RH
739@ifset UsesEnvVars
740The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 741@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
742some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
743@end ifset
744
745The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
746@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
747at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
748
749@cindex emulation
750@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 751@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
752Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
753emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
754
755If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
756@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
757
758Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
759configured.
760
761@cindex link map
762@kindex -M
763@kindex --print-map
764@item -M
765@itemx --print-map
766Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
767information about the link, including the following:
768
769@itemize @bullet
770@item
3b83e13a 771Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
772@item
773How common symbols are allocated.
774@item
775All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
776which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
777@item
778The values assigned to symbols.
779
780Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
781involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
782have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
783linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
784of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
785the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
786linker script containing:
787
788@smallexample
789 foo = 1
790 foo = foo * 4
791 foo = foo + 8
792@end smallexample
793
794will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
795option is used:
796
797@smallexample
798 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
800 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
801@end smallexample
802
803See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
804scripts.
d2ef37eb 805
06ddcada
AM
806@item
807How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 808
06ddcada
AM
809When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
810.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
811These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
812
813@smallexample
814Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
815@end smallexample
816
06ddcada 817This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
818merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
819is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
820
821@smallexample
06ddcada 822Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
823@end smallexample
824
06ddcada 825This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
826when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
827is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
828@end itemize
829
035801ce
FS
830@cindex link map discarded
831@kindex --print-map-discarded
832@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
833@item --print-map-discarded
834@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
835Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
836in the link map. Enabled by default.
837
252b5132
RH
838@kindex -n
839@cindex read-only text
840@cindex NMAGIC
841@kindex --nmagic
842@item -n
843@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
844Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
845libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
846mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
847
848@kindex -N
849@kindex --omagic
850@cindex read/write from cmd line
851@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 852@item -N
252b5132
RH
853@itemx --omagic
854Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
855not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
856libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
857mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
858is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
859specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
860
861@kindex --no-omagic
862@cindex OMAGIC
863@item --no-omagic
864This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
865sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
866be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
867shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
868
869@kindex -o @var{output}
870@kindex --output=@var{output}
871@cindex naming the output file
872@item -o @var{output}
873@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 874Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
875option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
876script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
877
878@kindex -O @var{level}
879@cindex generating optimized output
880@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 881If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 882the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
883should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
884option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
885the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
886no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
887of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 888
387dd777
DP
889@kindex -plugin @var{name}
890@item -plugin @var{name}
891Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
892the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
893automatically added by the complier, when using link time
894optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
895wish.
896
897Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
898from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
899@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
900those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
41f37a6f 901copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 902based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 903just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 904
26278bb8
UD
905@kindex --push-state
906@cindex push state governing input file handling
907@item --push-state
908The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
909flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
910restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
911
912The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
913@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
914@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
915@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
916@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
917@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
918
919One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
920used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
921listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
922something as follows:
923
924@smallexample
925-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
926@end smallexample
927
928@kindex --pop-state
929@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 930@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
931Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
932flags governing input file handling.
933
a712da20
NC
934@kindex -q
935@kindex --emit-relocs
936@cindex retain relocations in final executable
937@item -q
938@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 939Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
940Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
941order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
942in larger executables.
943
dbab7a7b
NC
944This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
945
4f471f39
RS
946@kindex --force-dynamic
947@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
948@item --force-dynamic
949Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
950to VxWorks targets.
951
252b5132
RH
952@cindex partial link
953@cindex relocatable output
954@kindex -r
1049f94e 955@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 956@item -r
1049f94e 957@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 958Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 959turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
960linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
961magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
962@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 963@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
964If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
965linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
966constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
967
62bf86b4
HPN
968When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
969partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
970relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
971example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
972with input files in other formats at all.
973
252b5132
RH
974This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
975
976@kindex -R @var{file}
977@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
978@cindex symbol-only input
979@item -R @var{filename}
980@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
981Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
982relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
983to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
984programs. You may use this option more than once.
985
ff5dcc92 986For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 987followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 988the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
989
990@kindex -s
991@kindex --strip-all
992@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 993@item -s
252b5132
RH
994@itemx --strip-all
995Omit all symbol information from the output file.
996
997@kindex -S
998@kindex --strip-debug
999@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 1000@item -S
252b5132
RH
1001@itemx --strip-debug
1002Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1003
a70f34c0
NC
1004@kindex --strip-discarded
1005@kindex --no-strip-discarded
1006@item --strip-discarded
1007@itemx --no-strip-discarded
1008Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1009Enabled by default.
1010
252b5132
RH
1011@kindex -t
1012@kindex --trace
1013@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 1014@item -t
252b5132 1015@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
1016Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1017@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1018@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1019and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1020a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
1021
1022@kindex -T @var{script}
1023@kindex --script=@var{script}
1024@cindex script files
1025@item -T @var{scriptfile}
1026@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1027Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 1028@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 1029@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
1030output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1031the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1032specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1033options accumulate.
252b5132 1034
14be8564
L
1035@kindex -dT @var{script}
1036@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1037@cindex script files
1038@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1039@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1040Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1041
1042This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1043processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1044command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1045@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1046behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1047command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1048the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1049@samp{gcc}).
1050
252b5132
RH
1051@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1052@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1053@cindex undefined symbol
1054@item -u @var{symbol}
1055@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1056Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1057symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1058modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1059different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1060option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1061
0a618243
AB
1062If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1063into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1064undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1065instead.
1066
1067@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1068@cindex symbols, require defined
1069@cindex defined symbol
1070@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1071Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1072is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1073is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1074and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1075@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1076can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1077
252b5132
RH
1078@kindex -Ur
1079@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1080@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1081For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1082@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1083turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1084@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1085It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1086with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1087be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1088@samp{-r} for the others.
1089
c005eb9e
AB
1090@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1091@cindex orphan sections
1092@cindex sections, orphan
1093@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1094Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1095specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1096
1097@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1098
1099@table @code
1100@item place
1101Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1102the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1103@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1104
1105@item discard
1106All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1107@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1108
1109@item warn
1110The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1111issue a warning.
1112
1113@item error
1114The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1115@end table
1116
1117The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1118
577a0623
AM
1119@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1121Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1122@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1123missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1124specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1125multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1126input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1127in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1128
252b5132
RH
1129@kindex -v
1130@kindex -V
1131@kindex --version
1132@cindex version
1133@item -v
1134@itemx --version
1135@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1136Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1137lists the supported emulations.
1138
1139@kindex -x
1140@kindex --discard-all
1141@cindex deleting local symbols
1142@item -x
1143@itemx --discard-all
1144Delete all local symbols.
1145
1146@kindex -X
1147@kindex --discard-locals
1148@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1149@item -X
252b5132 1150@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1151Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1152system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1153or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1154
1155@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1156@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1157@cindex symbol tracing
1158@item -y @var{symbol}
1159@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1160Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1161option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1162to prepend an underscore.
1163
1164This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1165don't know where the reference is coming from.
1166
1167@kindex -Y @var{path}
1168@item -Y @var{path}
1169Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1170for Solaris compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1173@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1174The recognized keywords are:
1175@table @samp
1176
e6e2dfbd
AM
1177@item bndplt
1178Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1179
1180@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1181@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1182@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1183@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1184Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1185to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1186@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1187@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1188@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1189@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1190Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1191
233a0083
L
1192@item cet-report=none
1193@itemx cet-report=warning
1194@itemx cet-report=error
1195Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1196GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1197section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1198linker not report missing properties in input files.
1199@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1200missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1201the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1202Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1203GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1204turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1205Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1206
cd6d6c15 1207@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1208@itemx nocombreloc
1209Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1210dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1211
b8871f35 1212@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1213@itemx nocommon
1214Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1215link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1216
1217@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1218Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1219layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1220using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1221
cd6d6c15 1222@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1223Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1224is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1225This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1226
e6e2dfbd
AM
1227@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1228@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1229Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1230if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1231by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1232@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1233may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1234selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1235these options.
1236
6aa29e7b
JJ
1237@item execstack
1238Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1239
b039ef04
L
1240@item global
1241This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1242the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1243of subsequently loaded libraries.
1244
93ab9c0d
NC
1245@item globalaudit
1246This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1247This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1248setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1249tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1250the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1251all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1252
e6e2dfbd
AM
1253@item ibtplt
1254Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1255Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1256
8df93cb5 1257@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1258Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1259to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1260Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1261
cd6d6c15
NC
1262@item initfirst
1263This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1264It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1265before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1266the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1267the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1268objects.
1269
1270@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1271Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1272so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1273libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1274
5fa222e4
AM
1275@item lazy
1276When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1277dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1278the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1279Lazy binding is the default.
1280
cd6d6c15 1281@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1282Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1283
e6e2dfbd
AM
1284@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1285Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1286
e6e2dfbd
AM
1287@item muldefs
1288Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1289
cd6d6c15 1290@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1291Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1292defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1293
1294@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1295Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1296should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1297
1298@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1299Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1300
1301@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1302Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1303
1304@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1305Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1306
6aa29e7b
JJ
1307@item noexecstack
1308Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1309
e6e2dfbd
AM
1310@item noextern-protected-data
1311Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1312library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1313used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1314generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1315module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1316i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1317
e6e2dfbd
AM
1318@item noreloc-overflow
1319Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1320relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1321overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1322
cd6d6c15
NC
1323@item now
1324When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1325dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1326when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1327function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1328called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1329
1330@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1331Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1332
6aa29e7b 1333@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1334@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1335Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1336specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1337relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1338than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1339Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1340
47acac12
L
1341@item separate-code
1342@itemx noseparate-code
1343Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1344specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1345be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1346code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1347
e6e2dfbd
AM
1348@item shstk
1349Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1350to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1351Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1352
04c3a755 1353@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1354Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1355Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1356@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1357
e6e2dfbd
AM
1358@item text
1359@itemx notext
1360@itemx textoff
a6dbf402
L
1361Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the position-independent
1362or shared object has dynamic relocations in read-only sections. Don't
1363report an error if @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1364
97a232d7
NC
1365@item undefs
1366Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1367either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1368This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1369
cd6d6c15
NC
1370@end table
1371
ece2d90e 1372Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1373
1374@kindex -(
1375@cindex groups of archives
1376@item -( @var{archives} -)
1377@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1378The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1379either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1380
1381The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1382references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1383the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1384archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1385object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1386would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1387they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1388resolved.
1389
1390Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1391it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1392more archives.
1393
69da35b5
NC
1394@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1395@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1396@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1397@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1398Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1399recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1400and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1401the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1402behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1403so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1404restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1405
4a43e768
AM
1406@kindex --as-needed
1407@kindex --no-as-needed
1408@item --as-needed
1409@itemx --no-as-needed
1410This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1411on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1412the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1413on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1414needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1415emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1416non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1417the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1418non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1419Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1420the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1421needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1422from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1423
e56f61be
L
1424@kindex --add-needed
1425@kindex --no-add-needed
1426@item --add-needed
1427@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1428These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1429their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1430options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1431and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1432
252b5132
RH
1433@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1434@item -assert @var{keyword}
1435This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1436
1437@kindex -Bdynamic
1438@kindex -dy
1439@kindex -call_shared
1440@item -Bdynamic
1441@itemx -dy
1442@itemx -call_shared
1443Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1444for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1445default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1446for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1447multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1448@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1449
a1ab1d2a
UD
1450@kindex -Bgroup
1451@item -Bgroup
1452Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1453section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1454object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1455@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1456only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1457
252b5132
RH
1458@kindex -Bstatic
1459@kindex -dn
1460@kindex -non_shared
1461@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1462@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1463@itemx -dn
1464@itemx -non_shared
1465@itemx -static
1466Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1467platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1468variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1469may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1470library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1471option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1472option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1473shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1474references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1475libraries.
252b5132
RH
1476
1477@kindex -Bsymbolic
1478@item -Bsymbolic
1479When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1480definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1481for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1914e264
AM
1482within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1483platforms which support shared libraries.
252b5132 1484
40b36307
L
1485@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1486@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1487When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1488symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307 1489This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1914e264 1490libraries.
40b36307 1491
55255dae
L
1492@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1494Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1495typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1496global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1497within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1498to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1499in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1500which support shared libraries.
1501
1502The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1503scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1504
40b36307
L
1505@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1506@item --dynamic-list-data
1507Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1508
1509@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1511Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1512is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1513
0b8a70d9
L
1514@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1516Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1517
252b5132
RH
1518@kindex --check-sections
1519@kindex --no-check-sections
1520@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1521@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1522Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1523been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1524perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1525suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1526allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1527restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1528Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1529force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1530option.
252b5132 1531
ddbb8a31
NC
1532@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1533@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1534@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1535@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1536This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1537by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1538command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1539output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1540input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1541specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1542follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1543behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1544
1545This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1546libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1547mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1548their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1549required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1550the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1551dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1552symbols.
1553
252b5132
RH
1554@cindex cross reference table
1555@kindex --cref
1556@item --cref
1557Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1558generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1559Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1560
1561The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1562easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1563sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1564symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1565definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1566where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1567symbol are listed.
252b5132 1568
4818e05f
AM
1569@cindex common allocation
1570@kindex --no-define-common
1571@item --no-define-common
1572This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1573The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1574@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1575
1576The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1577the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1578of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1579forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1580Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1581from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1582This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1583and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1584duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1585paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1586
7bdf4127
AB
1587@cindex group allocation in linker script
1588@cindex section groups
1589@cindex COMDAT
1590@kindex --force-group-allocation
1591@item --force-group-allocation
1592This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1593normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1594default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1595change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1596command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1597effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1598
252b5132 1599@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1600@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1601@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1602Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1603address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1604times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1605limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1606context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1607symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1608constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1609using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1610@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1611equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1612
1613@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1614@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1615@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1616@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1617@itemx --no-demangle
1618These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1619and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1620present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1621underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1622mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1623different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1624to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1625demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1626is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1627
1628@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1629@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1630@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1631@item -I@var{file}
1632@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1633Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1634generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1635linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1636doing.
1637
9b8b325a
RF
1638@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1639@item --no-dynamic-linker
1640When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1641linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1642executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1643entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1644
a70f34c0
NC
1645@kindex --embedded-relocs
1646@item --embedded-relocs
1647This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1648that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1649is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1650targets.
1651
3f0a5f17
ME
1652@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1654Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1655in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1656
7ce691ae 1657@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1658@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1659@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1660@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1661Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1662with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1663
252b5132
RH
1664@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1665@item --force-exe-suffix
1666Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1667
1668If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1669@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1670the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1671option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1672Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1673it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1674
1675@kindex --gc-sections
1676@kindex --no-gc-sections
1677@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1678@item --gc-sections
1679@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1680Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1681targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1682performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1683@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1684collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1685implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1686
d5465ba2
AM
1687@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1688examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1689symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1690command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1691referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1692libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1693referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1694the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1695relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1696@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1697
ac69cbc6 1698This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1699@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1700specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1701@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1702command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1703
c17d87de
NC
1704@kindex --print-gc-sections
1705@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1706@cindex garbage collection
1707@item --print-gc-sections
1708@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1709List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1710printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1711collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1712default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1713be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1714line.
1715
22185505 1716@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1717@cindex garbage collection
1718@item --gc-keep-exported
1719When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1720collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1721default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1722executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1723collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1724Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1725it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1726ELF format targets.
1727
30824704
RM
1728@kindex --print-output-format
1729@cindex output format
1730@item --print-output-format
1731Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1732other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1733in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1734
3604cb1f
TG
1735@kindex --print-memory-usage
1736@cindex memory usage
1737@item --print-memory-usage
1738Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1739the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1740quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1741headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1742parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1743
1744@smallexample
1745Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1746 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1747 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1748@end smallexample
1749
252b5132
RH
1750@cindex help
1751@cindex usage
1752@kindex --help
1753@item --help
1754Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1755
ea20a7da
CC
1756@kindex --target-help
1757@item --target-help
a094d01f 1758Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1759
2509a395
SL
1760@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1761@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1762Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
72a3b182
NC
1763@option{-M} option, above. Specifying a directory as @var{mapfile}
1764causes the linker map to be written into a file inside the directory.
1765The name of the file is based upon the @var{output} filename with
1766@code{.map} appended.
252b5132
RH
1767
1768@cindex memory usage
1769@kindex --no-keep-memory
1770@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1771@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1772symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1773instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1774necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1775while linking a large executable.
1776
1777@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1778@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1779@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1780@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1781@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1782Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1783is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1784The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1785behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1786libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1787
97a232d7
NC
1788The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1789
aa713662
L
1790@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1791@kindex -z muldefs
1792@item --allow-multiple-definition
1793@itemx -z muldefs
1794Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1795report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1796first definition will be used.
1797
b79e8c78 1798@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1799@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1800@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1801@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1802Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1803This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1804determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1805shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1806how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1807
903249d7
NC
1808The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1809referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1810an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1811a shared library.
1812
1813The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1814libraries specified at link time are that:
1815
1816@itemize @bullet
1817@item
1818A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1819that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1820resolvable at load time.
1821@item
1822There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1823symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1824
1825The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1826select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1827architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1828appropriate memset function.
1829@end itemize
b79e8c78 1830
31941635
L
1831@kindex --no-undefined-version
1832@item --no-undefined-version
1833Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1834it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1835will be issued instead.
1836
3e3b46e5
PB
1837@kindex --default-symver
1838@item --default-symver
1839Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1840exported symbols.
1841
1842@kindex --default-imported-symver
1843@item --default-imported-symver
1844Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1845imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1846
252b5132
RH
1847@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1848@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1849Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1850files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1851been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1852This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1853errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1854have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1855inappropriate.
1856
fe7929ce
AM
1857@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1858@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1859Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1860library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1861
252b5132
RH
1862@kindex --no-whole-archive
1863@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1864Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1865archive files.
1866
1867@cindex output file after errors
1868@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1869@item --noinhibit-exec
1870Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1871Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1872errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1873when it issues any error whatsoever.
1874
0a9c1c8e
CD
1875@kindex -nostdlib
1876@item -nostdlib
1877Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1878command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1879(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1880
252b5132 1881@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1882@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1883@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1884@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1885file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1886@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1887object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1888object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1889should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1890usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1891name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1892list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1893command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1894this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1895@end ifclear
1896
76359541
TP
1897@kindex --out-implib
1898@item --out-implib @var{file}
1899Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1900the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1901library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1902may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1903behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1904step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1905the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1906
36af4a4e
JJ
1907@kindex -pie
1908@kindex --pic-executable
1909@item -pie
1910@itemx --pic-executable
1911@cindex position independent executables
1912Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1913ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1914libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1915address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1916normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1917defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1918
252b5132
RH
1919@kindex -qmagic
1920@item -qmagic
1921This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1922
1923@kindex -Qy
1924@item -Qy
1925This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1926
1927@kindex --relax
1928@cindex synthesizing linker
1929@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1930@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1931@item --relax
28d5f677 1932@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1933An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1934@ifset GENERIC
1935This option is only supported on a few targets.
1936@end ifset
1937@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1938@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1939@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1940@ifset XTENSA
1941@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1942@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1943@ifset M68HC11
1944@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1945@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1946@ifset NIOSII
1947@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1948@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1949@ifset POWERPC
1950@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1951@end ifset
252b5132 1952
a094d01f 1953On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1954global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1955addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1956synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1957instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1958
1959On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1960debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1961@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1962This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1963family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1964@end ifset
1965
1966@ifset GENERIC
1967On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1968but ignored.
1969@end ifset
1970
28d5f677
NC
1971On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1972@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1973
252b5132
RH
1974@cindex retaining specified symbols
1975@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1976@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1977@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1978@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1979Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1980discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1981symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1982@ifset GENERIC
1983(such as VxWorks)
1984@end ifset
1985where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1986run-time memory.
1987
1988@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1989or symbols needed for relocations.
1990
1991You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1992line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1993
1994@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1995@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1996@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1997@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1998Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1999linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 2000arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
2001them to locate shared objects at runtime.
2002
2003The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2004are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2005description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2006in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2007have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2008
2009If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2010contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2011is defined.
252b5132 2012
ff5dcc92 2013The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 2014SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
2015@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2016runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2017options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2018gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 2019file systems.
252b5132 2020
ff5dcc92 2021For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 2022followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 2023the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
2024@end ifset
2025
2026@ifset GENERIC
2027@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
2028@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2029@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
2030When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2031happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2032of the input files.
2033
2034When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2035non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2036shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 2037explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 2038specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 2039@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
2040either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2041appearing multiple times.
2042
e680a6b6
NC
2043The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2044directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2045containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2046and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
204764-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2048
2049The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2050@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2051supported.
2052
28c309a2
NC
2053This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2054that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2055is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2056runtime linker would do.
2057
252b5132 2058The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2059libraries:
d8e4137b 2060
252b5132
RH
2061@enumerate
2062@item
ff5dcc92 2063Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2064@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2065Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2066between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2067specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2068used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2069at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2070by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2071the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2072@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2073On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2074@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2075environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2076@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2077On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2078directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2079@item
a1b8d843 2080For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2081variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2082@item
ec4eb78a
L
2083For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2084@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2085libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2086@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2087@item
252b5132
RH
2088The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2089@item
d8e4137b
NC
2090For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2091exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2092to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2093defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2094configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2095@item
2096For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2097the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2098header file.
2099@item
2100Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2101linker script being used.
252b5132
RH
2102@end enumerate
2103
2104If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2105warning and continue with the link.
2106@end ifset
2107
2108@kindex -shared
2109@kindex -Bshareable
2110@item -shared
2111@itemx -Bshareable
2112@cindex shared libraries
2113Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2114and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2115shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2116undefined symbols in the link.
2117
252b5132 2118@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2119@item --sort-common
2120@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2121@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2122This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2123ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2124sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2125eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2126between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2127specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2128
2509a395
SL
2129@kindex --sort-section=name
2130@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2131This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2132patterns in the linker script.
2133
2509a395
SL
2134@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2135@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2136This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2137patterns in the linker script.
2138
a70f34c0
NC
2139@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2140@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2141This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2142.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2143post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2144
252b5132 2145@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2146@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2147Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2148each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2149size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2150
2151@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2152@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2153Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2154output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2155This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2156certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2157cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2158that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2159support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2160input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2161more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2162many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2163
2164@kindex --stats
2165@item --stats
2166Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2167as execution time and memory usage.
2168
2509a395 2169@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2170@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2171Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2172configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2173that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2174
a70f34c0
NC
2175@kindex --task-link
2176@item --task-link
2177This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2178file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2179
252b5132
RH
2180@kindex --traditional-format
2181@cindex traditional format
2182@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2183For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2184the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2185use the traditional format instead.
2186
2187@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2188For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2189symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2190full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2191@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2192trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2193combine duplicate entries.
2194
2509a395
SL
2195@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2196@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2197Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2198address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2199times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2200line.
2201@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2202for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2203@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2204should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2205sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2206
2509a395
SL
2207@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2208@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2209@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2210@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2211@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2212@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2213@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2214Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2215@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2216
2509a395
SL
2217@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2218@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2219@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2220When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2221byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2222
9d5777a3
RM
2223@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2224@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2225@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2226When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2227the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2228text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2229
0d705e9f
AM
2230@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2231@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2232@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2233When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2234model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2235
560e09e9
NC
2236@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2237@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2238Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2239values for @samp{method}:
2240
2241@table @samp
2242@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2243Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2244
2245@item report-all
da8bce14 2246Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2247
2248@item ignore-in-object-files
2249Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2250ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2251
2252@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2253Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2254ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2255when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2256libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2257command line.
2258@end table
2259
2260The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2261by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2262
2263Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2264unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2265can change this to a warning.
2266
1715a13c
L
2267@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2268@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2269@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2270@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2271Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2272supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2273the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2274argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2275
2276@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2277@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2278@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2279Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2280used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2281about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2282is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2283see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2284use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2285symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2286@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2287
7ce691ae 2288@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2289@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2290@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2291@item --warn-common
2292Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2293a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2294but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2295you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2296Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2297warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2298
2299There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2300
2301@table @samp
2302@item int i = 1;
2303A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2304file.
2305
2306@item extern int i;
2307An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2308There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2309variable somewhere.
2310
2311@item int i;
2312A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2313variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2314The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2315single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2316size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2317a definition of the same variable.
2318@end table
2319
2320The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2321Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2322just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2323encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2324a common symbol.
2325
2326@enumerate
2327@item
2328Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2329definition for the symbol.
2330@smallexample
2331@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2332 overridden by definition
2333@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2334@end smallexample
2335
2336@item
2337Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2338the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2339except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2340@smallexample
2341@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2342 overriding common
2343@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2344@end smallexample
2345
2346@item
2347Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2348@smallexample
2349@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2350 of `@var{symbol}'
2351@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2352@end smallexample
2353
2354@item
2355Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2356@smallexample
2357@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2358 overridden by larger common
2359@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2360@end smallexample
2361
2362@item
2363Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2364the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2365encountered in a different order.
2366@smallexample
2367@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2368 overriding smaller common
2369@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2370@end smallexample
2371@end enumerate
2372
2373@kindex --warn-constructors
2374@item --warn-constructors
2375Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2376object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2377detect the use of global constructors.
2378
2379@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2380@item --warn-multiple-gp
2381Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2382This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2383Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2384section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2385of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2386base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2387base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2388bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2389large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2390values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2391option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2392
2393@kindex --warn-once
2394@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2395@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2396@item --warn-once
2397Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2398which refers to it.
2399
2400@kindex --warn-section-align
2401@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2402@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2403@item --warn-section-align
2404Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2405alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2406The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2407is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2408the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2409
a6dbf402
L
2410@kindex --warn-textrel
2411@item --warn-textrel
2412Warn if the linker adds DT_TEXTREL to a position-independent executable
2413or shared object.
8fdd7217 2414
a0c402a5
L
2415@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2416@item --warn-alternate-em
2417Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2418
560e09e9
NC
2419@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2420@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2421If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2422@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2423This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2424
2425@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2426@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2427This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2428it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2429
252b5132
RH
2430@kindex --whole-archive
2431@cindex including an entire archive
2432@item --whole-archive
2433For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2434@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2435in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2436files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2437library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2438library. This option may be used more than once.
2439
7ec229ce 2440Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2441about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2442Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2443list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2444your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2445
2509a395
SL
2446@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2447@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2448Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2449@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2450undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2451@var{symbol}.
2452
2453This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2454wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2455wishes to call the system function, it should call
2456@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2457
2458Here is a trivial example:
2459
2460@smallexample
2461void *
cc2f008e 2462__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2463@{
cc2f008e 2464 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2465 return __real_malloc (c);
2466@}
2467@end smallexample
2468
ff5dcc92 2469If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2470all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2471instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2472call the real @code{malloc} function.
2473
2474You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2475links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2476you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2477file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2478call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2479
4ea904ed
SH
2480Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2481internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2482@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2483@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2484
2485@smallexample
2486int
2487f (void)
2488@{
2489 return 123;
2490@}
2491
2492int
2493g (void)
2494@{
2495 return f();
2496@}
2497@end smallexample
2498
6aa29e7b 2499@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2500@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2501@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2502@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2503Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2504(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2505section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2506
e41b3a13
JJ
2507@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2508@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2509Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2510generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2511if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2512
6c1439be
L
2513@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2514@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2515@item --enable-new-dtags
2516@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2517This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2518systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2519@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2520and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2521If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2522created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2523those options are only available for ELF systems.
2524
2d643429 2525@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2526@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2527Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2528close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2529time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2530increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2531value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2532
fdc90cb4
JJ
2533@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2534@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2535Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2536@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2537new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2538the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2539hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2540but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2541
0ce398f1
L
2542@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2543@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2544@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2545@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2546@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2547@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2548@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2549@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2550On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2551compressed using zlib.
2552
2553@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2554sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2555DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2556instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2557also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2558sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2559
2560The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2561@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2562
2563Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2564sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2565for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2566uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2567
2568The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2569involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2570default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2571@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2572
35835446
JR
2573@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2574@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2575This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2576linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2577for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2578about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2579
4f9c04f7 2580Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25811021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2582run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2583has been used.
2584
2585The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2586enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2587
c0065db7
RM
2588@kindex --build-id
2589@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2590@item --build-id
2591@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2592Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2593or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2594unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2595@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2596@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2597@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2598the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2599string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2600@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2601is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2602
2603The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2604that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2605unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2606to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2607file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2608string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2609
2610Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2611@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2612@end table
2613
0285c67d
NC
2614@c man end
2615
36f63dca 2616@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2617
0285c67d
NC
2618@c man begin OPTIONS
2619
ff5dcc92 2620The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2621the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2622normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2623use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2624@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2625like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2626symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2627object file).
2628
2629In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2630support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2631PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2632values by either a space or an equals sign.
2633
ff5dcc92 2634@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2635
2636@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2637@item --add-stdcall-alias
2638If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2639as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2640[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2641
2642@kindex --base-file
2643@item --base-file @var{file}
2644Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2645addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2646@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2647[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2648
2649@kindex --dll
2650@item --dll
2651Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2652@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2653file.
bb10df36 2654[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2655
88183869
DK
2656@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2657@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2658@item --enable-long-section-names
2659@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2660The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2661the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2662for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2663fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2664to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2665allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2666disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2667generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2668as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2669with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2670GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2671information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2672option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2673section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2674when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2675image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2676[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2677
252b5132
RH
2678@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2679@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2680@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2681@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2682If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2683do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2684only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2685resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2686undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2687@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2688to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2689warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2690import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2691to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2692feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2693@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2694mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2695[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2696
522f09cd
KT
2697@kindex --leading-underscore
2698@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2699@item --leading-underscore
2700@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2701For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2702in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2703disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2704
252b5132
RH
2705@cindex DLLs, creating
2706@kindex --export-all-symbols
2707@item --export-all-symbols
2708If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2709be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2710otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2711explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2712attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2713option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2714@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2715@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2716exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2717re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2718such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2719@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2720@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2721Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2722not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2723extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2724(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2725These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2726@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2727@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2728@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2729@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2730[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2731
2732@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2733@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2734Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2735exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2736[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2737
2927aaca
NC
2738@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2739@item --exclude-all-symbols
2740Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2741[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2742
252b5132
RH
2743@kindex --file-alignment
2744@item --file-alignment
2745Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2746file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2747512.
bb10df36 2748[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2749
2750@cindex heap size
2751@kindex --heap
2752@item --heap @var{reserve}
2753@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2754Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2755to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2756committed.
bb10df36 2757[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2758
2759@cindex image base
2760@kindex --image-base
2761@item --image-base @var{value}
2762Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2763the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2764is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2765your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2766other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2767for dlls.
bb10df36 2768[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2769
2770@kindex --kill-at
2771@item --kill-at
2772If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2773symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2774[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2775
26d2d8a2
BF
2776@kindex --large-address-aware
2777@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2778If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2779header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2780greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2781or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2782section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2783[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2784
f69a2f97
NC
2785@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2786@item --disable-large-address-aware
2787Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2788This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2789driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2790addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2791[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2792
252b5132
RH
2793@kindex --major-image-version
2794@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2795Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2796[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2797
2798@kindex --major-os-version
2799@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2800Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2801[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2802
2803@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2804@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2805Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2806[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2807
2808@kindex --minor-image-version
2809@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2810Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2811[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2812
2813@kindex --minor-os-version
2814@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2815Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2816[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2817
2818@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2819@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2820Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2821[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2822
2823@cindex DEF files, creating
2824@cindex DLLs, creating
2825@kindex --output-def
2826@item --output-def @var{file}
2827The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2828file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2829(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2830library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2831automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2832[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2833
b044cda1 2834@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2835@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2836@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2837@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2838Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2839@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2840By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2841for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2842execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2843[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2844
2845@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2846@item --disable-auto-image-base
2847Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2848user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2849default.
bb10df36 2850[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2851
2852@cindex DLLs, linking to
2853@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2854@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2855When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2856search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2857@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2858between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2859uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2860@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2861[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2862
2863@kindex --enable-auto-import
2864@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2865Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2866DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2867mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2868[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2869
2870The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2871feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2872
2873Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2874of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2875PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2876
e2a83dd0
NC
2877Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2878data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2879placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2880around a problem with consts that is described here:
2881http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2882
4d8907ac
DS
2883Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2884see this message:
0d888aac 2885
ece2d90e 2886"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2887documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2888
ece2d90e
NC
2889This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2890ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2891allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2892fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2893constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2894multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2895this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2896of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2897the warning, and exit.
2898
2899There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2900data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2901
2fa9fc65
NC
2902One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2903of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2904this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2905
c0065db7
RM
2906A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2907that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2908there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2909a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2910
2911@example
2912extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2913extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2914 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2915@end example
2916
2917or
2918
2919@example
2920extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2921extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2922 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2923@end example
2924
c0065db7 2925For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2926is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2927
2928@example
2929extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2930extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2931 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2932@end example
2933
c406afaf
NC
2934or
2935
2936@example
2937extern long long extern_ll;
2938extern_ll -->
2939 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2940@end example
2941
2fa9fc65 2942A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2943'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2944@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2945requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2946building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2947merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2948between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2949constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2950
2951Original:
2952@example
2953--foo.h
2954extern int arr[];
2955--foo.c
2956#include "foo.h"
2957void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2958 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2959@}
2960@end example
2961
2962Solution 1:
2963@example
2964--foo.h
2965extern int arr[];
2966--foo.c
2967#include "foo.h"
2968void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2969 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2970 volatile int *parr = arr;
2971 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2972@}
2973@end example
2974
2975Solution 2:
2976@example
2977--foo.h
2978/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2979#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2980 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2981#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2982#else
2983#define FOO_IMPORT
2984#endif
2985extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2986--foo.c
2987#include "foo.h"
2988void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2989 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2990@}
2991@end example
2992
c0065db7 2993A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2994library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2995for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2996functions).
b044cda1
CW
2997
2998@kindex --disable-auto-import
2999@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 3000Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 3001@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 3002[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3003
2fa9fc65
NC
3004@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3005@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3006If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3007that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3008a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 3009environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 3010[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
3011
3012@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3013@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 3014Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 3015[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 3016
b044cda1
CW
3017@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3018@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3019Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 3020[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3021
252b5132
RH
3022@kindex --section-alignment
3023@item --section-alignment
3024Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3025addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 3026[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3027
3028@cindex stack size
3029@kindex --stack
3030@item --stack @var{reserve}
3031@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 3032Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 3033to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 3034committed.
bb10df36 3035[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3036
3037@kindex --subsystem
3038@item --subsystem @var{which}
3039@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3040@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3041Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3042legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
3043@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3044the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3045@var{which}.
bb10df36 3046[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 3047
2f563b51
DK
3048The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3049of the PE file header:
3050[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3051
2d5c3743
NC
3052@kindex --high-entropy-va
3053@item --high-entropy-va
3054Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3055(ASLR).
dc9bd8c9
HD
3056This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3057@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2d5c3743 3058
2f563b51
DK
3059@kindex --dynamicbase
3060@item --dynamicbase
3061The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3062randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3063Vista for i386 PE targets.
dc9bd8c9 3064This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2f563b51
DK
3065
3066@kindex --forceinteg
3067@item --forceinteg
3068Code integrity checks are enforced.
3069
3070@kindex --nxcompat
3071@item --nxcompat
3072The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3073This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3074
3075@kindex --no-isolation
3076@item --no-isolation
3077Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3078
3079@kindex --no-seh
3080@item --no-seh
3081The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3082this image.
3083
3084@kindex --no-bind
3085@item --no-bind
3086Do not bind this image.
3087
3088@kindex --wdmdriver
3089@item --wdmdriver
3090The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3091
2f563b51
DK
3092@kindex --tsaware
3093@item --tsaware
3094The image is Terminal Server aware.
3095
0cb112f7
CF
3096@kindex --insert-timestamp
3097@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3098@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3099Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3100as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3101other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3102will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3103same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3104can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3105that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3106identically.
dc9bd8c9
HD
3107
3108@kindex --enable-reloc-section
3109@item --enable-reloc-section
3110Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3111is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
252b5132
RH
3112@end table
3113
0285c67d
NC
3114@c man end
3115
ac145307
BS
3116@ifset C6X
3117@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3118
3119@c man begin OPTIONS
3120
3121The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3122libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3123all executables use an index of 0.
3124
3125@table @gcctabopt
3126
3127@kindex --dsbt-size
3128@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3129This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3130or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3131entries.
3132
3133@kindex --dsbt-index
3134@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3135This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3136to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3137executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3138@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3139
fbd9ad90
PB
3140@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3141The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3142exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3143
ac145307
BS
3144@end table
3145
3146@c man end
3147@end ifset
3148
b8891f8d
AJ
3149@ifset CSKY
3150@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3151
3152@c man begin OPTIONS
3153
3154@table @gcctabopt
3155
3156@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3157@item --branch-stub
3158This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3159sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3160usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3161can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3162the compiler or assembler.
3163
3164@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3165@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3166This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3167It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3168be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3169stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3170sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3171@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3172linker should choose suitable defaults.
3173
3174@end table
3175
3176@c man end
3177@end ifset
3178
93fd0973
SC
3179@ifset M68HC11
3180@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3181
3182@c man begin OPTIONS
3183
3184The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3185memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3186
3187@table @gcctabopt
3188
3189@kindex --no-trampoline
3190@item --no-trampoline
3191This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3192is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3193instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3194
3195@kindex --bank-window
3196@item --bank-window @var{name}
3197This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3198the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3199The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3200paging and addresses within the memory window.
3201
3202@end table
3203
3204@c man end
3205@end ifset
3206
7fb9f789
NC
3207@ifset M68K
3208@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3209
3210@c man begin OPTIONS
3211
3212The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3213when linking for 68K targets.
3214
3215@table @gcctabopt
3216
3217@kindex --got
3218@item --got=@var{type}
3219This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3220@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3221@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3222Info entry for @file{ld}.
3223
3224@end table
3225
3226@c man end
3227@end ifset
3228
833794fc
MR
3229@ifset MIPS
3230@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3231
3232@c man begin OPTIONS
3233
3234The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3235generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3236linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3237
3238@table @gcctabopt
3239
3240@kindex --insn32
3241@item --insn32
3242@kindex --no-insn32
3243@itemx --no-insn32
3244These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3245generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3246or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
324732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3248used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3249possible.
3250
8b10b0b3
MR
3251@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3252@item --ignore-branch-isa
3253@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3254@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3255These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3256transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3257accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3258is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3259instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3260equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3261calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3262a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3263an error.
3264
3734320d
MF
3265@kindex --compact-branches
3266@item --compact-branches
3267@kindex --no-compact-branches
fa1477dc 3268@itemx --no-compact-branches
3734320d
MF
3269These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3270in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3271
833794fc
MR
3272@end table
3273
3274@c man end
3275@end ifset
3276
fa1477dc
SC
3277
3278@ifset PDP11
3279@subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3280
3281@c man begin OPTIONS
3282
3283For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3284produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3285for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3286targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3287defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3288here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3289
3290@table @gcctabopt
3291
3292@kindex -N
3293@item -N
3294@kindex --omagic
3295@itemx --omagic
3296
3297Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3298indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3299shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3300writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3301the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3302programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3303from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3304
3305@kindex -n
3306@item -n
3307@kindex --nmagic
3308@itemx --nmagic
3309
3310Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3311indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3312be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3313file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3314byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3315a @emph{pure executable} format.
3316
3317@kindex -z
3318@item -z
3319@kindex --imagic
3320@itemx --imagic
3321
3322Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3323indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3324data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3325instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3326larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3327to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3328shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3329option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3330and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3331this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3332executable} format.
3333
3334@kindex --no-omagic
3335@item --no-omagic
3336
3337Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3338
3339@end table
3340
3341@c man end
3342@end ifset
3343
252b5132
RH
3344@ifset UsesEnvVars
3345@node Environment
3346@section Environment Variables
3347
0285c67d
NC
3348@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3349
560e09e9 3350You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3351@ifclear SingleFormat
3352@code{GNUTARGET},
3353@end ifclear
3354@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3355
36f63dca 3356@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3357@kindex GNUTARGET
3358@cindex default input format
3359@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3360use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3361of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3362@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3363of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3364attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3365this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3366there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3367object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3368BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3369in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3370@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3371
3372@kindex LDEMULATION
3373@cindex default emulation
3374@cindex emulation, default
3375@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3376@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3377behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3378available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3379the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3380variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3381linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3382
3383@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3384@cindex demangling, default
3385Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3386@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3387default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3388a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3389may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3390options.
3391
0285c67d
NC
3392@c man end
3393@end ifset
3394
252b5132
RH
3395@node Scripts
3396@chapter Linker Scripts
3397
3398@cindex scripts
3399@cindex linker scripts
3400@cindex command files
3401Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3402written in the linker command language.
3403
3404The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3405the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3406the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3407more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3408direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3409described below.
3410
3411The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3412yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3413linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3414to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3415such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3416
3417You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3418line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3419default linker script.
3420
3421You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3422to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3423Linker Scripts}.
3424
3425@menu
3426* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3427* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3428* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3429* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3430* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3431* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3432* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3433* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3434* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3435* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3436* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3437@end menu
3438
3439@node Basic Script Concepts
3440@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3441@cindex linker script concepts
3442We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3443describe the linker script language.
3444
3445The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3446file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3447@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3448The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3449purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3450among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3451section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3452in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3453
3454Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3455also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3456contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3457the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3458A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3459area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3460loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3461which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3462of debugging information.
3463
3464Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3465first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3466the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3467@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3468section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3469same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3470is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3471(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3472based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3473RAM address would be the VMA.
3474
3475You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3476program with the @samp{-h} option.
3477
3478Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3479@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3480has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3481information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3482will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3483static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3484referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3485
3486You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3487program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3488option.
3489
3490@node Script Format
3491@section Linker Script Format
3492@cindex linker script format
3493Linker scripts are text files.
3494
3495You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3496either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3497symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3498generally ignored.
3499
3500Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3501If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3502otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3503double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3504file name.
3505
3506You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3507@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3508to whitespace.
3509
3510@node Simple Example
3511@section Simple Linker Script Example
3512@cindex linker script example
3513@cindex example of linker script
3514Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3515
3516The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3517@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3518memory layout of the output file.
3519
3520The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3521describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3522code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3523@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3524Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3525your input files.
3526
3527For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
35280x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3529linker script which will do that:
3530@smallexample
3531SECTIONS
3532@{
3533 . = 0x10000;
3534 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3535 . = 0x8000000;
3536 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3537 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3538@}
3539@end smallexample
3540
3541You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3542followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3543descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3544
252b5132
RH
3545The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3546sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3547counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3548other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3549current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3550incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3551@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3552
3553The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3554required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3555after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3556which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3557wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3558means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3559
3560Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3561@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3562@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3563
3564The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3565the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3566at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3567output section, the value of the location counter will be
3568@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3569effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3570immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3571
3572The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3573alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3574example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3575sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3576may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3577sections.
3578
3579That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3580
3581@node Simple Commands
3582@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3583@cindex linker script simple commands
3584In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3585
3586@menu
3587* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3588* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3589@ifclear SingleFormat
3590* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3591@end ifclear
3592
4a93e180 3593* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3594* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3595@end menu
3596
3597@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3598@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3599@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3600@cindex start of execution
3601@cindex first instruction
3602@cindex entry point
3603The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3604point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3605entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3606@smallexample
3607ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3608@end smallexample
3609
3610There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3611entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3612stopping when one of them succeeds:
3613@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3614@item
252b5132 3615the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3616@item
252b5132 3617the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3618@item
a094d01f 3619the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3620targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3621check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3622@item
252b5132 3623the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3624@item
252b5132
RH
3625The address @code{0}.
3626@end itemize
3627
3628@node File Commands
36f63dca 3629@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3630@cindex linker script file commands
3631Several linker script commands deal with files.
3632
3633@table @code
3634@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3635@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3636@cindex including a linker script
3637Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3638be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3639with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
364010 levels deep.
3641
4006703d
NS
3642You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3643@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3644
252b5132
RH
3645@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3646@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3647@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3648@cindex input files in linker scripts
3649@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3650@cindex linker script input object files
3651The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3652in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3653
3654For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3655a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3656then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3657
3658In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3659script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3660
e3f2db7f
AO
3661In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3662with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3663located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
16171946
FS
3664for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying
3665@code{=} as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the
3666filename path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of
3667@samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3668
3669If a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is not used then the linker will try to open
3670the file in the directory containing the linker script. If it is not
3671found the linker will then search the current directory. If it is still
3672not found the linker will search through the archive library search
3673path.
252b5132 3674
ff5dcc92 3675If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3676name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3677@samp{-l}.
3678
3679When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3680files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3681script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3682
3683@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3684@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3685@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3686@cindex grouping input files
3687The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3688files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3689new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3690in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3691
b717d30e
JJ
3692@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3693@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3694@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3695This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3696commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3697as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3698with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3699when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3700@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3701and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3702setting afterwards.
3703
252b5132
RH
3704@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3705@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3706@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3707The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3708@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3709@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3710Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3711precedence.
3712
3713You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3714output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3715
3716@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3717@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3718@cindex library search path in linker script
3719@cindex archive search path in linker script
3720@cindex search path in linker script
3721The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3722@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3723@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3724on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3725are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3726the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3727
3728@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3729@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3730@cindex first input file
3731The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3732that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3733though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3734when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3735first file.
3736@end table
3737
3738@ifclear SingleFormat
3739@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3740@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3741A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3742
3743@table @code
3744@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3745@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3746@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3747@cindex output file format in linker script
3748The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3749output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3750exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3751(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3752line option takes precedence.
3753
3754You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3755formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3756This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3757desired endianness.
3758
3759If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3760will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3761output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3762used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3763
3764For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3765command:
3766@smallexample
3767OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3768@end smallexample
3769This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3770@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3771option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3772format.
3773
3774@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3775@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3776@cindex input file format in linker script
3777The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3778files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3779This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3780(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3781is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3782command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3783@end table
3784@end ifclear
3785
4a93e180
NC
3786@node REGION_ALIAS
3787@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3788@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3789@cindex region alias
3790@cindex region names
3791
3792Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3793@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3794
3795@smallexample
3796REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3797@end smallexample
3798
3799The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3800memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3801to memory regions. An example follows.
3802
3803Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3804memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3805that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3806non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3807access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3808read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3809sections:
3810
3811@itemize @bullet
3812@item
3813@code{.text} program code;
3814@item
3815@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3816@item
3817@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3818@item
3819@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3820@end itemize
3821
3822The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3823part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3824output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3825systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3826@code{C}:
3827@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3828@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3829@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3830@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3831@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3832@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3833@end multitable
3834The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3835loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3836the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3837the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3838
3839The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3840includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3841memory layout:
3842@smallexample
3843INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3844
3845SECTIONS
3846 @{
3847 .text :
3848 @{
3849 *(.text)
3850 @} > REGION_TEXT
3851 .rodata :
3852 @{
3853 *(.rodata)
3854 rodata_end = .;
3855 @} > REGION_RODATA
3856 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3857 @{
3858 data_start = .;
3859 *(.data)
3860 @} > REGION_DATA
3861 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3862 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3863 .bss :
3864 @{
3865 *(.bss)
3866 @} > REGION_BSS
3867 @}
3868@end smallexample
3869
3870Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3871regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3872variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3873@table @code
3874@item A
3875Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3876@smallexample
3877MEMORY
3878 @{
3879 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3880 @}
3881
3882REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3883REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3884REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3885REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3886@end smallexample
3887@item B
3888Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3889into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3890@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3891@smallexample
3892MEMORY
3893 @{
3894 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3895 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3896 @}
3897
3898REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3899REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3900REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3901REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3902@end smallexample
3903@item C
3904Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3905@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3906initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3907system start into the @code{RAM}.
3908@smallexample
3909MEMORY
3910 @{
3911 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3912 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3913 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3914 @}
3915
3916REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3917REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3918REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3919REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3920@end smallexample
3921@end table
3922
3923It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3924@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3925necessary:
3926@smallexample
3927#include <string.h>
3928
3929extern char data_start [];
3930extern char data_size [];
3931extern char data_load_start [];
3932
3933void copy_data(void)
3934@{
3935 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3936 @{
3937 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3938 @}
3939@}
3940@end smallexample
3941
252b5132 3942@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3943@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3944There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3945
3946@table @code
3947@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3948@kindex ASSERT
3949@cindex assertion in linker script
3950Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3951with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3952
fd1c4238
NC
3953Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3954take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3955inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3956for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3957symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3958
3959@smallexample
3960 .stack :
3961 @{
3962 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3963 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3964 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3965 @}
3966@end smallexample
3967
3968will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3969PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3970can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3971
3972@smallexample
3973 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3974 .stack :
3975 @{
3976 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3977 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3978 @}
3979@end smallexample
3980
3981will work.
3982
252b5132
RH
3983@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3984@kindex EXTERN
3985@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3986Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3987symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3988modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3989each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3990command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3991
3992@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3993@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3994@cindex common allocation in linker script
3995This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3996to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3997output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3998
4818e05f
AM
3999@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4000@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4001@cindex common allocation in linker script
4002This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
4003command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
4004to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
4005
7bdf4127
AB
4006@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4007@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4008@cindex group allocation in linker script
4009@cindex section groups
4010@cindex COMDAT
4011This command has the same effect as the
4012@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4013@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4014and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4015specified (@samp{-r}).
4016
53d25da6
AM
4017@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4018@kindex INSERT
4019@cindex insert user script into default script
4020This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4021augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4022inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4023@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4024default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4025sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4026linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4027insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4028linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4029default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4030of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4031to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4032is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4033
4034@smallexample
4035SECTIONS
4036@{
4037 OVERLAY :
4038 @{
4039 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4040 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4041 @}
4042@}
4043INSERT AFTER .text;
4044@end smallexample
4045
252b5132
RH
4046@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4047@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4048@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 4049This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
4050references among certain output sections.
4051
4052In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4053using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4054will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4055errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4056a function defined in the other section.
4057
4058The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 4059@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
4060an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4061@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4062names.
4063
cdf96953
MF
4064@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4065@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4066@cindex cross references
4067This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4068references to one section from a list of other sections.
4069
4070The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4071output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4072a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4073there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4074must never call back.
4075
4076The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4077The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4078If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4079the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4080status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4081names, not input section names.
4082
252b5132
RH
4083@ifclear SingleFormat
4084@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4085@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4086@cindex machine architecture
4087@cindex architecture
4088Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4089of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4090architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4091the @samp{-f} option.
4092@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
4093
4094@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4095@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4096This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4097@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4098in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4099@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
4100@end table
4101
4102@node Assignments
4103@section Assigning Values to Symbols
4104@cindex assignment in scripts
4105@cindex symbol definition, scripts
4106@cindex variables, defining
4107You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 4108the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
4109
4110@menu
4111* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 4112* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 4113* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 4114* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 4115* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
4116@end menu
4117
4118@node Simple Assignments
4119@subsection Simple Assignments
4120
4121You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4122
4123@table @code
4124@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4125@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4126@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4127@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4128@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4129@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4130@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4131@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4132@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4133@end table
4134
4135The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4136@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4137defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4138
4139The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4140may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4141
4142The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4143
4144Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4145
4146You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4147statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4148section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4149
4150The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4151expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4152
4153Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4154assignments may be used:
4155
4156@smallexample
4157floating_point = 0;
4158SECTIONS
4159@{
4160 .text :
4161 @{
4162 *(.text)
4163 _etext = .;
4164 @}
156e34dd 4165 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4166 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4167@}
4168@end smallexample
4169@noindent
4170In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4171zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4172the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4173defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4174upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4175
eb8476a6
MR
4176@node HIDDEN
4177@subsection HIDDEN
4178@cindex HIDDEN
4179For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4180exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4181
4182Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4183@code{HIDDEN}:
4184
4185@smallexample
4186HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4187SECTIONS
4188@{
4189 .text :
4190 @{
4191 *(.text)
4192 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4193 @}
4194 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4195 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4196@}
4197@end smallexample
4198@noindent
4199In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4200
252b5132
RH
4201@node PROVIDE
4202@subsection PROVIDE
4203@cindex PROVIDE
4204In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4205only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4206the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4207@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4208@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4209@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4210@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4211@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4212
4213Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4214@smallexample
4215SECTIONS
4216@{
4217 .text :
4218 @{
4219 *(.text)
4220 _etext = .;
4221 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4222 @}
4223@}
4224@end smallexample
4225
4226In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4227underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4228the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4229underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4230If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4231linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4232
b0daac83
NC
4233Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4234defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4235that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4236when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4237@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4238
7af8e998
L
4239@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4240@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4241@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4242Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4243hidden and won't be exported.
4244
73ae6183
NC
4245@node Source Code Reference
4246@subsection Source Code Reference
4247
4248Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4249intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4250a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4251symbol that does not have a value.
4252
4253Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4254transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4255stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4256prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4257mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4258of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4259variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4260linker script variable might be referred to as:
4261
4262@smallexample
4263 extern int foo;
4264@end smallexample
4265
4266But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4267
4268@smallexample
4269 _foo = 1000;
4270@end smallexample
4271
4272In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4273transformation has taken place.
4274
4275When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4276things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4277in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4278second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4279table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4280contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4281value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4282
4283@smallexample
4284 int foo = 1000;
4285@end smallexample
4286
10bf6894 4287creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4288holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4289number 1000 is initially stored.
4290
4291When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4292first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4293memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4294So:
4295
4296@smallexample
4297 foo = 1;
4298@end smallexample
4299
4300looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4301associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4302address. Whereas:
4303
4304@smallexample
4305 int * a = & foo;
4306@end smallexample
4307
10bf6894 4308looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4309and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4310the variable @samp{a}.
4311
4312Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4313the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4314an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4315
4316@smallexample
4317 foo = 1000;
4318@end smallexample
4319
4320creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4321the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4322address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4323linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4324access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4325
4326Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4327you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4328use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4329section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4330linker script contains these declarations:
4331
4332@smallexample
4333@group
4334 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4335 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4336 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4337@end group
4338@end smallexample
4339
4340Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4341
4342@smallexample
4343@group
4344 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4345
73ae6183
NC
4346 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4347@end group
4348@end smallexample
4349
4350Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4351Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4352arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4353
4354@smallexample
4355@group
4356 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4357
4358 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4359@end group
4360@end smallexample
4361
4362Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4363operators.
73ae6183 4364
252b5132 4365@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4366@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4367@kindex SECTIONS
4368The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4369into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4370
4371The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4372@smallexample
4373SECTIONS
4374@{
4375 @var{sections-command}
4376 @var{sections-command}
4377 @dots{}
4378@}
4379@end smallexample
4380
4381Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4382
4383@itemize @bullet
4384@item
4385an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4386@item
4387a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4388@item
4389an output section description
4390@item
4391an overlay description
4392@end itemize
4393
4394The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4395@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4396those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4397understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4398the layout of the output file.
4399
4400Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4401below.
4402
4403If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4404linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4405section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4406input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4407example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4408in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4409
4410@menu
4411* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4412* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4413* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4414* Input Section:: Input section description
4415* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4416* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4417* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4418* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4419* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4420@end menu
4421
4422@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4423@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4424The full description of an output section looks like this:
4425@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4426@group
7e7d5768 4427@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4428 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4429 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4430 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4431 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4432 @{
4433 @var{output-section-command}
4434 @var{output-section-command}
4435 @dots{}
abc9061b 4436 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4437@end group
4438@end smallexample
4439
4440Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4441
4442The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4443name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4444The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4445the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4446The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4447
4448Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4449
4450@itemize @bullet
4451@item
4452a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4453@item
4454an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4455@item
4456data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4457@item
4458a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4459@end itemize
4460
4461@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4462@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4463@cindex name, section
4464@cindex section name
4465The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4466meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4467support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4468must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4469example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4470output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4471names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4472quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4473characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4474commas must be quoted.
4475
4476The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4477Discarding}.
4478
4479@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4480@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4481@cindex address, section
4482@cindex section address
4483The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4484address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4485is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4486
4487If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4488section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4489to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4490alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4491contained within the output section.
4492
4493The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4494
4495@itemize @bullet
4496@item
4497If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4498is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4499in that region.
4500
4501@item
4502If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4503regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4504section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4505be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4506
4507@item
4508If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4509the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4510counter.
4511@end itemize
4512
4513@noindent
4514For example:
4515
252b5132
RH
4516@smallexample
4517.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4518@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4519
252b5132
RH
4520@noindent
4521and
ea5cae92 4522
252b5132
RH
4523@smallexample
4524.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4525@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4526
252b5132
RH
4527@noindent
4528are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4529@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4530counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4531counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4532input sections.
252b5132
RH
4533
4534The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4535For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4536so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4537do something like this:
4538@smallexample
4539.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4540@end smallexample
4541@noindent
4542This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4543aligned upward to the specified value.
4544
4545Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4546location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4547sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4548
4549@node Input Section
36f63dca 4550@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4551@cindex input sections
4552@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4553The most common output section command is an input section description.
4554
4555The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4556You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4557in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4558map the input files into your memory layout.
4559
4560@menu
4561* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4562* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4563* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4564* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4565* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4566@end menu
4567
4568@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4569@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4570@cindex input section basics
4571An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4572by a list of section names in parentheses.
4573
4574The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4575describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4576
4577The most common input section description is to include all input
4578sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4579include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4580@smallexample
4581*(.text)
4582@end smallexample
4583@noindent
18625d54 4584Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4585@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4586of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4587match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4588example:
252b5132 4589@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4590EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4591@end smallexample
4592@noindent
4593will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4594and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4595placed inside the section list, for example:
4596@smallexample
b4346c09 4597*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4598@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4599@noindent
4600The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4601two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4602more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4603
4604There are two ways to include more than one section:
4605@smallexample
4606*(.text .rdata)
4607*(.text) *(.rdata)
4608@end smallexample
4609@noindent
4610The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4611@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4612first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4613they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4614@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4615@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4616
8f1732fc
AB
4617When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4618is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4619immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4620@smallexample
4621*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4622@end smallexample
4623@noindent
4624will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4625@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4626from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4627exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4628could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4629@smallexample
4630*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4631@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4632@noindent
4633Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4634before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4635all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4636@smallexample
4637EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4638@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4639
252b5132
RH
4640You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4641You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4642needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4643@smallexample
4644data.o(.data)
4645@end smallexample
4646
ae17ab41
CM
4647To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4648of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4649
4650Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4651
4652@smallexample
4653@group
4654SECTIONS @{
4655 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4656 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4657@}
4658@end group
4659@end smallexample
4660
4661In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4662input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4663@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4664@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4665whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4666
967928e9
AM
4667You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4668matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4669with no whitespace around the colon.
4670
4671@table @samp
4672@item archive:file
4673matches file within archive
4674@item archive:
4675matches the whole archive
4676@item :file
4677matches file but not one in an archive
4678@end table
4679
4680Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4681wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4682single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4683@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4684within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4685also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4686other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4687from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4688command.
4689
252b5132
RH
4690If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4691the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4692commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4693@smallexample
4694data.o
4695@end smallexample
4696
967928e9
AM
4697When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4698and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4699characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4700name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4701did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4702though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4703@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4704the archive search path.
4705
4706@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4707@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4708@cindex input section wildcards
4709@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4710@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4711@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4712In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4713name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4714
4715The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4716pattern for the file name.
4717
4718The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4719
4720@table @samp
4721@item *
4722matches any number of characters
4723@item ?
4724matches any single character
4725@item [@var{chars}]
4726matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4727character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4728@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4729@item \
4730quotes the following character
4731@end table
4732
4733When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4734will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4735Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4736exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4737@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4738a @samp{/} character.
4739
4740File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4741specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4742does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4743
4744If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4745appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4746will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4747sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4748@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4749@smallexample
4750.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4751.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4752@end smallexample
4753
bcaa7b3e 4754@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4755Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4756in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4757this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4758pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4759@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4760into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4761
bcaa7b3e 4762@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
9a24a276
AM
4763@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4764@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4765alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4766alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4767needed.
bcaa7b3e 4768
02ecc8e9 4769@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
9a24a276
AM
4770@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4771@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4772numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4773section name before placing them in the output file. In
4774@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4775the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4776@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
02ecc8e9 4777
bcaa7b3e
L
4778@cindex SORT
4779@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4780
4781When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4782can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4783
4784@enumerate
4785@item
4786@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4787It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4788sections have the same name.
4789@item
4790@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4791It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4792sections have the same alignment.
4793@item
c0065db7 4794@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4795treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4796@item
4797@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4798is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4799@item
4800All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4801@end enumerate
4802
a05a5b64 4803When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4804section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4805takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4806
4807If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4808command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4809treated as nested sorting command.
4810
4811@enumerate
4812@item
4813@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4814@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4815@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4816@item
4817@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4818@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4819@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4820@end enumerate
4821
4822If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4823command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4824
eda680f8 4825@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4826@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4827section sorting option.
4828
252b5132
RH
4829If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4830@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4831precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4832
4833This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4834files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4835sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4836The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4837with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4838linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4839@smallexample
4840@group
4841SECTIONS @{
4842 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4843 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4844 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4845 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4846@}
4847@end group
4848@end smallexample
4849
4850@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4851@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4852@cindex common symbol placement
4853@cindex uninitialized data placement
4854A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4855file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4856linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4857named @samp{COMMON}.
4858
4859You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4860other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4861particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4862input files are placed in another section.
4863
4864In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4865@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4866@smallexample
4867.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4868@end smallexample
4869
4870@cindex scommon section
4871@cindex small common symbols
4872Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4873example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4874symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4875different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4876the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4877symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4878to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4879locations.
4880
4881@cindex [COMMON]
4882You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4883notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4884@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4885
4886@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4887@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4888@cindex KEEP
4889@cindex garbage collection
4890When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4891it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4892This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4893with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4894@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4895
4896@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4897@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4898The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4899to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4900start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4901@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4902follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4903@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4904@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4905All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4906files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4907
4908@smallexample
4909@group
4910SECTIONS @{
4911 outputa 0x10000 :
4912 @{
4913 all.o
4914 foo.o (.input1)
4915 @}
36f63dca
NC
4916@end group
4917@group
252b5132
RH
4918 outputb :
4919 @{
4920 foo.o (.input2)
4921 foo1.o (.input1)
4922 @}
36f63dca
NC
4923@end group
4924@group
252b5132
RH
4925 outputc :
4926 @{
4927 *(.input1)
4928 *(.input2)
4929 @}
4930@}
4931@end group
a1ab1d2a 4932@end smallexample
252b5132 4933
cbd0eecf
L
4934If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4935and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4936automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4937__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4938indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4939respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4940C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4941
252b5132 4942@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4943@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4944@cindex data
4945@cindex section data
4946@cindex output section data
4947@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4948@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4949@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4950@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4951@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4952You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4953@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4954an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4955parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4956value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4957counter.
4958
4959The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4960store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4961bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4962stored.
4963
4964For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4965of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4966@smallexample
4967BYTE(1)
4968LONG(addr)
4969@end smallexample
4970
4971When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4972same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4973target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4974@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4975@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4976
4977If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4978which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4979When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4980true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4981endianness of the first input object file.
4982
36f63dca 4983Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4984between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4985@smallexample
4986SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4987@end smallexample
4988whereas this will work:
4989@smallexample
4990SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4991@end smallexample
4992
252b5132
RH
4993@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4994@cindex holes, filling
4995@cindex unspecified memory
4996You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4997current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4998otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4999gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 5000with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
5001necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
5002point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
5003than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
5004different parts of an output section.
5005
5006This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 5007value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 5008@smallexample
563e308f 5009FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
5010@end smallexample
5011
5012The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 5013section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
5014part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5015entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 5016precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 5017expression.
252b5132
RH
5018
5019@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 5020@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
5021There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5022commands.
5023
5024@table @code
5025@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5026@cindex input filename symbols
5027@cindex filename symbols
5028@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5029The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5030The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5031file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5032the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5033
5034This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5035normally used for any other object file format.
5036
5037@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5038@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5039@cindex constructors, arranging in link
5040@item CONSTRUCTORS
5041When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5042unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5043destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5044arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5045automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5046For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5047linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5048@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5049ignored for other object file formats.
5050
5051The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
5052constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5053Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5054the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
5055first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5056of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5057compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5058formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5059@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5060the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5061destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5062@code{exit}.
5063
5064For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5065arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5066addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5067and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5068linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5069runtime code expects to see.
5070
5071@smallexample
5072 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5073 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5074 *(.ctors)
5075 LONG(0)
5076 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5077 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5078 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5079 *(.dtors)
5080 LONG(0)
5081 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5082@end smallexample
5083
5084If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5085which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5086are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5087are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
5088command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5089@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5090@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
5091@samp{*(.dtors)}.
5092
5093Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5094and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5095need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5096scripts.
5097
5098@end table
5099
5100@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 5101@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
5102@cindex discarding sections
5103@cindex sections, discarding
5104@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
5105The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5106This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5107may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 5108@smallexample
49c13adb 5109.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
5110@end smallexample
5111@noindent
5112will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
5113@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5114sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
5115space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5116too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5117space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5118@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5119@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5120This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 5121
a0976ea4 5122The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
5123on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5124symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
5125the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5126section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
5127
5128@cindex /DISCARD/
5129The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5130input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5131section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5132
a2e098c3
NC
5133Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5134discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5135members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5136Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5137
252b5132 5138@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5139@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5140@cindex output section attributes
5141We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5142like this:
0c71d759 5143
252b5132 5144@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5145@group
7e7d5768 5146@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5147 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5148 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5149 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5150 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5151 @{
5152 @var{output-section-command}
5153 @var{output-section-command}
5154 @dots{}
562d3460 5155 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5156@end group
5157@end smallexample
0c71d759 5158
252b5132
RH
5159We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5160@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5161remaining section attributes.
5162
a1ab1d2a 5163@menu
252b5132
RH
5164* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5165* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5166* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5167* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5168* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5169* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5170* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5171* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5172@end menu
5173
5174@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5175@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5176Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5177parentheses. The following types are defined:
5178
5179@table @code
5180@item NOLOAD
5181The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5182loaded into memory when the program is run.
5183@item DSECT
5184@itemx COPY
5185@itemx INFO
5186@itemx OVERLAY
5187These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5188rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5189marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5190section when the program is run.
5191@end table
5192
5193@kindex NOLOAD
5194@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5195@cindex loading, preventing
5196The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5197the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5198the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5199@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5200need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5201@smallexample
5202@group
5203SECTIONS @{
5204 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5205 @dots{}
5206@}
5207@end group
5208@end smallexample
5209
5210@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5211@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5212@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5213@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5214@cindex load address
5215@cindex section load address
5216Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5217@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5218@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5219specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5220address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5221
ea5cae92
NC
5222The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5223specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5224takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5225load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5226region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5227
5228If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5229section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5230load address:
5231
5232@itemize @bullet
5233@item
5234If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5235the LMA address as well.
5236
5237@item
5238If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5239
5240@item
5241Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5242with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5243section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5244VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5245the last section in the located region.
5246
5247@item
5248If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5249that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5250
5251@item
5252If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5253section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5254@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5255
5256@cindex ROM initialized data
5257@cindex initialized data in ROM
5258This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5259example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5260called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5261@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5262even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5263uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5264defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5265counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5266
5267@smallexample
5268@group
5269SECTIONS
5270 @{
5271 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5272 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5273 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5274 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5275 .bss 0x3000 :
5276 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5277@}
5278@end group
5279@end smallexample
5280
5281The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5282this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5283the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5284how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5285script.
5286
5287@smallexample
5288@group
5289extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5290char *src = &_etext;
5291char *dst = &_data;
5292
ea5cae92
NC
5293/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5294while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5295 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5296
ea5cae92 5297/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5298for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5299 *dst = 0;
5300@end group
5301@end smallexample
5302
bbf115d3
L
5303@node Forced Output Alignment
5304@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5305@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5306@cindex forcing output section alignment
5307@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5308You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5309alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5310intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5311
7e7d5768
AM
5312@node Forced Input Alignment
5313@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5314@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5315@cindex forcing input section alignment
5316@cindex input section alignment
5317You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5318SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5319sections, whether larger or smaller.
5320
0c71d759
NC
5321@node Output Section Constraint
5322@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5323@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5324@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5325@cindex constraints on output sections
5326You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5327of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5328read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5329@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5330
252b5132 5331@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5332@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5333@kindex >@var{region}
5334@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5335@cindex memory regions and sections
5336You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5337using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5338
5339Here is a simple example:
5340@smallexample
5341@group
5342MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5343SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5344@end group
5345@end smallexample
5346
5347@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5348@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5349@kindex :@var{phdr}
5350@cindex section, assigning to program header
5351@cindex program headers and sections
5352You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5353using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5354one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5355assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5356@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5357linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5358
5359Here is a simple example:
5360@smallexample
5361@group
5362PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5363SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5364@end group
5365@end smallexample
5366
5367@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5368@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5369@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5370@cindex section fill pattern
5371@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5372You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5373@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5374(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5375within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5376alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5377necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5378of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5379an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5380fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5381other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5382pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5383expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5384
5385You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5386output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5387
5388Here is a simple example:
5389@smallexample
5390@group
563e308f 5391SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5392@end group
5393@end smallexample
5394
5395@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5396@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5397@kindex OVERLAY
5398@cindex overlays
5399An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5400are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5401the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5402copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5403required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5404can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5405than another.
5406
5407Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5408@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5409output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5410command is as follows:
5411@smallexample
5412@group
5413OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5414 @{
5415 @var{secname1}
5416 @{
5417 @var{output-section-command}
5418 @var{output-section-command}
5419 @dots{}
5420 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5421 @var{secname2}
5422 @{
5423 @var{output-section-command}
5424 @var{output-section-command}
5425 @dots{}
5426 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5427 @dots{}
abc9061b 5428 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5429@end group
5430@end smallexample
5431
5432Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5433section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5434section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5435those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5436except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5437sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5438
abc9061b
CC
5439The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5440the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5441
252b5132
RH
5442The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5443addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5444memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5445whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5446and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5447and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5448
56dd11f0
NC
5449If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5450references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5451the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5452sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5453@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5454
5455For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5456provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5457defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5458@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5459the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5460within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5461symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5462
5463At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5464the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5465
5466Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5467@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5468@smallexample
5469@group
5470 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5471 @{
5472 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5473 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5474 @}
5475@end group
5476@end smallexample
5477@noindent
5478This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5479address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5480@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5481following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5482@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5483@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5484
5485C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5486like the following.
5487
5488@smallexample
5489@group
5490 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5491 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5492 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5493@end group
5494@end smallexample
5495
5496Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5497everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5498example could have been written identically as follows.
5499
5500@smallexample
5501@group
5502 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5503 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5504 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5505 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5506 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5507 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5508 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5509@end group
5510@end smallexample
5511
5512@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5513@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5514@kindex MEMORY
5515@cindex memory regions
5516@cindex regions of memory
5517@cindex allocating memory
5518@cindex discontinuous memory
5519The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5520memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5521
5522The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5523memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5524may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5525can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5526set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5527regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5528around to fit into the available regions.
5529
127fcdff
AB
5530A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5531however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5532specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5533@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5534@smallexample
5535@group
a1ab1d2a 5536MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5537 @{
5538 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5539 @dots{}
5540 @}
5541@end group
5542@end smallexample
5543
5544The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5545region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5546Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5547with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5548must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5549add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5550command.
252b5132
RH
5551
5552@cindex memory region attributes
5553The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5554whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5555not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5556@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5557section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5558the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5559them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5560
5561The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5562@table @samp
5563@item R
5564Read-only section
5565@item W
5566Read/write section
5567@item X
5568Executable section
5569@item A
5570Allocatable section
5571@item I
5572Initialized section
5573@item L
5574Same as @samp{I}
5575@item !
c09e9a8c 5576Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5577@end table
5578
81c688d5 5579If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5580@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5581attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5582unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5583not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5584string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5585or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5586the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5587
5588@kindex ORIGIN =
5589@kindex o =
5590@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5591The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5592the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5593cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5594abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5595@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5596
5597@kindex LENGTH =
5598@kindex len =
5599@kindex l =
5600The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5601region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5602be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5603@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5604
5605In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5606available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5607and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5608linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5609is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5610or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5611explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5612region.
5613
5614@smallexample
5615@group
a1ab1d2a 5616MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5617 @{
5618 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5619 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5620 @}
5621@end group
5622@end smallexample
5623
5624Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5625specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5626@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5627a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5628output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5629was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5630the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5631output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5632region, the linker will issue an error message.
5633
3ec57632 5634It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5635expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5636@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5637
5638@smallexample
5639@group
c0065db7 5640 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5641@end group
5642@end smallexample
5643
252b5132
RH
5644@node PHDRS
5645@section PHDRS Command
5646@kindex PHDRS
5647@cindex program headers
5648@cindex ELF program headers
5649@cindex program segments
5650@cindex segments, ELF
5651The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5652@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5653loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5654program with the @samp{-p} option.
5655
5656When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5657reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5658program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5659This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5660interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5661
5662The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5663in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5664precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5665the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5666not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5667
5668The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5669generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5670ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5671
5672This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5673@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5674
5675@smallexample
5676@group
5677PHDRS
5678@{
5679 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5680 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5681@}
5682@end group
5683@end smallexample
5684
5685The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5686of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5687header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5688with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5689must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5690is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5691
5692Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5693system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5694specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5695sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5696attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5697Section Phdr}.
5698
5699It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5700merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5701repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5702contain the section.
5703
5704If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5705then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5706not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5707convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5708placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5709default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5710segment at all.
5711
5712@kindex FILEHDR
5713@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5714You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5715the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5716The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5717file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5718include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5719segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5720these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5721
5722The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5723value of the keyword.
5724
5725@table @asis
5726@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5727Indicates an unused program header.
5728
5729@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5730Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5731the file.
5732
5733@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5734Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5735
5736@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5737Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5738found.
5739
5740@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5741Indicates a segment holding note information.
5742
5743@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5744A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5745ABI.
5746
5747@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5748Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5749
1a9ccd70
NC
5750@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5751Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5752
252b5132
RH
5753@item @var{expression}
5754An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5755be used for types not defined above.
5756@end table
5757
5758You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5759in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5760@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5761Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5762output section attribute.
5763
5764The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5765which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5766explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5767an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5768header.
5769
5770Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5771headers used on a native ELF system.
5772
5773@example
5774@group
5775PHDRS
5776@{
5777 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5778 interp PT_INTERP ;
5779 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5780 data PT_LOAD ;
5781 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5782@}
5783
5784SECTIONS
5785@{
5786 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5787 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5788 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5789 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5790 @dots{}
5791 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5792 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5793 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5794 @dots{}
5795@}
5796@end group
5797@end example
5798
5799@node VERSION
5800@section VERSION Command
5801@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5802@cindex symbol versions
5803@cindex version script
5804@cindex versions of symbols
5805The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5806only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5807symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5808a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5809shared library.
5810
5811You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5812you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5813also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5814
5815The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5816@smallexample
5817VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5818@end smallexample
5819
5820The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5821Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5822version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5823version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5824version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5825scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5826library.
5827
5828The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5829examples.
5830
5831@smallexample
5832VERS_1.1 @{
5833 global:
5834 foo1;
5835 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5836 old*;
5837 original*;
5838 new*;
252b5132
RH
5839@};
5840
5841VERS_1.2 @{
5842 foo2;
5843@} VERS_1.1;
5844
5845VERS_2.0 @{
5846 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5847 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5848 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5849 "f(int, double)";
5850 @};
252b5132
RH
5851@} VERS_1.2;
5852@end smallexample
5853
5854This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5855version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5856The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5857a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5858of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5859symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5860is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5861in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5862However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5863name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5864
5865Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5866depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5867to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5868
5869Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5870depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5871and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5872
5873When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5874specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5875unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5876unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5877somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5878wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5879wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5880set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5881ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5882
5883The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5884they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5885could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5886However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5887
0f6bf451 5888Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5889in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5890symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5891won't.
5892
5893@smallexample
7c9c73be 5894@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5895@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5896
252b5132
RH
5897When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5898symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5899requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5900shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5901loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5902linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5903application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5904way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5905all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5906search for each symbol reference.
5907
5908The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5909doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5910that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5911functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5912the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5913required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5914that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5915versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5916the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5917
5918There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5919first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5920source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5921script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5922maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5923@smallexample
5924__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5925@end smallexample
5926@noindent
5927in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5928be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5929The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5930@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5931takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5932
5933The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5934function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5935an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5936version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5937linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5938
5939To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5940source file. Here is an example:
5941
5942@smallexample
5943__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5944__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5945__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5946__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5947@end smallexample
5948
5949In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5950unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5951example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5952@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5953
5954When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5955some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5956this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5957@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5958declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5959you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5960
5961If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5962within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5963(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5964specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5965
cb840a31
L
5966You can also specify the language in the version script:
5967
5968@smallexample
5969VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5970@end smallexample
5971
c0065db7 5972The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5973The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5974demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5975patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5976@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5977
86043bbb
MM
5978Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5979described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5980or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5981the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5982whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5983cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5984might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5985should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5986expect when you upgrade.
5987
252b5132
RH
5988@node Expressions
5989@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5990@cindex expressions
5991@cindex arithmetic
5992The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5993that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5994expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5995host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5996
5997You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5998
5999The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
6000expressions.
6001
6002@menu
6003* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 6004* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 6005* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 6006* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
6007* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6008* Operators:: Operators
6009* Evaluation:: Evaluation
6010* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6011* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6012@end menu
6013
6014@node Constants
6015@subsection Constants
6016@cindex integer notation
6017@cindex constants in linker scripts
6018All constants are integers.
6019
6020As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6021octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 6022hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 6023@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
6024@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6025value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
6026
6027@cindex scaled integers
6028@cindex K and M integer suffixes
6029@cindex M and K integer suffixes
6030@cindex suffixes for integers
6031@cindex integer suffixes
6032In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6033constant by
6034@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6035@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6036@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6037@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6038@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6039@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6040@tex
6041${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6042@end tex
6043@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
6044respectively. For example, the following
6045all refer to the same quantity:
6046
252b5132 6047@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6048_fourk_1 = 4K;
6049_fourk_2 = 4096;
6050_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 6051_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
6052@end smallexample
6053
8a308ae8
NC
6054Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6055conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6056
0c71d759
NC
6057@node Symbolic Constants
6058@subsection Symbolic Constants
6059@cindex symbolic constants
6060@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 6061It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
6062the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6063
6064@table @code
6065@item MAXPAGESIZE
6066@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6067The target's maximum page size.
6068
6069@item COMMONPAGESIZE
6070@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6071The target's default page size.
6072@end table
6073
6074So for example:
6075
6076@smallexample
9d5777a3 6077 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
6078@end smallexample
6079
6080will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6081supported by the target.
6082
252b5132
RH
6083@node Symbols
6084@subsection Symbol Names
6085@cindex symbol names
6086@cindex names
6087@cindex quoted symbol names
6088@kindex "
6089Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6090and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6091Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6092specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6093keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6094@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6095"SECTION" = 9;
6096"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
6097@end smallexample
6098
6099Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6100to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6101whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6102
ecca9871
L
6103@node Orphan Sections
6104@subsection Orphan Sections
6105@cindex orphan
6106Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6107are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6108script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
6109output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6110in which to place the orphaned input section.
6111
6112If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6113an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6114placed at the end of that output section.
6115
6116If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6117sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6118name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6119orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6120one new output section.
6121
6122If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6123then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
6124in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6125linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6126attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6127sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6128support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 6129
a05a5b64
TP
6130The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6131(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
6132output sections an orphan is placed in.
6133
252b5132
RH
6134@node Location Counter
6135@subsection The Location Counter
6136@kindex .
6137@cindex dot
6138@cindex location counter
6139@cindex current output location
6140The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6141current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6142location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6143within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6144anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6145
6146@cindex holes
6147Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6148moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6149location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6150and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6151doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6152
6153@smallexample
6154SECTIONS
6155@{
6156 output :
6157 @{
6158 file1(.text)
6159 . = . + 1000;
6160 file2(.text)
6161 . += 1000;
6162 file3(.text)
563e308f 6163 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6164@}
6165@end smallexample
6166@noindent
6167In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6168located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6169followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6170@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6171@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6172specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6173
5c6bbab8
NC
6174@cindex dot inside sections
6175Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6176current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6177statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6178absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6179however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6180not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6181
6182@smallexample
6183SECTIONS
6184@{
6185 . = 0x100
6186 .text: @{
6187 *(.text)
6188 . = 0x200
6189 @}
6190 . = 0x500
6191 .data: @{
6192 *(.data)
6193 . += 0x600
6194 @}
6195@}
6196@end smallexample
6197
6198The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6199and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6200the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6201much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6202move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6203and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6204the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6205the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6206
b5666f2f
AM
6207@cindex dot outside sections
6208Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6209output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6210needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6211
6212@smallexample
6213SECTIONS
6214@{
6215 start_of_text = . ;
6216 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6217 end_of_text = . ;
6218
6219 start_of_data = . ;
6220 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6221 end_of_data = . ;
6222@}
6223@end smallexample
6224
6225If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6226not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6227between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6228should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6229blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6230the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6231sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6232statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6233special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6234place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6235as follows:
6236
6237@smallexample
6238SECTIONS
6239@{
6240 start_of_text = . ;
6241 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6242 end_of_text = . ;
6243
6244 start_of_data = . ;
6245 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6246 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6247 end_of_data = . ;
6248@}
6249@end smallexample
6250
6251This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6252@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6253placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6254assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6255a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6256section. So you could write:
6257
6258@smallexample
6259SECTIONS
6260@{
6261 start_of_text = . ;
6262 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6263 end_of_text = . ;
6264
6265 . = . ;
6266 start_of_data = . ;
6267 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6268 end_of_data = . ;
6269@}
6270@end smallexample
6271
6272Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6273@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6274
252b5132
RH
6275@need 2000
6276@node Operators
6277@subsection Operators
6278@cindex operators for arithmetic
6279@cindex arithmetic operators
6280@cindex precedence in expressions
6281The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6282the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6283@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6284@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6285@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6286@smallexample
6287precedence associativity Operators Notes
6288(highest)
62891 left ! - ~ (1)
62902 left * / %
62913 left + -
62924 left >> <<
62935 left == != > < <= >=
62946 left &
62957 left |
62968 left &&
62979 left ||
629810 right ? :
629911 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6300(lowest)
6301@end smallexample
6302Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6303(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6304(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6305@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6306@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6307@tex
6308\vskip \baselineskip
6309%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6310\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6311\hrule
6312\halign
6313{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6314height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6315&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6316height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6317\noalign{\hrule}
6318height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6319&highest&&&&&\cr
6320% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6321&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6322&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6323&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6324&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6325&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6326&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6327&7&&left&&|&\cr
6328&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6329&9&&left&&||&\cr
6330&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6331&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6332&lowest&&&&&\cr
6333height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6334\hrule}
6335@end tex
6336@iftex
6337{
6338@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6339@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6340@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6341}
6342@end iftex
6343@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6344
6345@node Evaluation
6346@subsection Evaluation
6347@cindex lazy evaluation
6348@cindex expression evaluation order
6349The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6350an expression when absolutely necessary.
6351
6352The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6353address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6354regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6355as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6356
6357However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6358until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6359other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6360for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6361
6362The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6363assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6364allocation.
6365
6366Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6367@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6368
6369If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6370available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6371following
6372@smallexample
6373@group
6374SECTIONS
6375 @{
a1ab1d2a 6376 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6377 @{ *(.text) @}
6378 @}
6379@end group
6380@end smallexample
6381@noindent
6382will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6383address}.
6384
6385@node Expression Section
6386@subsection The Section of an Expression
6387@cindex expression sections
6388@cindex absolute expressions
6389@cindex relative expressions
6390@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6391@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6392@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6393Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6394relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6395using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6396value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6397symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6398operations.
6399
abf4be64
AM
6400Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6401section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6402address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6403@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6404functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6405One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6406(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6407differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6408versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6409section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6410Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6411absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6412given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6413everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6414
6415In the following simple example,
252b5132 6416
7542af2a
AM
6417@smallexample
6418@group
6419SECTIONS
6420 @{
6421 . = 0x100;
6422 __executable_start = 0x100;
6423 .data :
6424 @{
6425 . = 0x10;
6426 __data_start = 0x10;
6427 *(.data)
6428 @}
6429 @dots{}
6430 @}
6431@end group
6432@end smallexample
252b5132 6433
7542af2a
AM
6434both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6435address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6436@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6437section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6438
5c3049d2
AM
6439For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6440addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6441
6442@itemize @bullet
6443@item
c05f749e
AM
6444Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6445operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6446absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6447@item
7542af2a
AM
6448Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6449relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6450and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6451@item
c05f749e
AM
6452Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6453in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6454address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6455before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6456@end itemize
6457
6458The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6459
6460@itemize @bullet
6461@item
6462An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6463@item
6464The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6465@item
9bc8bb33 6466The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6467relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6468(after above conversions) is also a number when
6469@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6470but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6471@item
6472The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6473relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6474section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6475@item
6476The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6477conversions) is an absolute address.
6478@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6479
6480You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6481to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6482create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6483section @samp{.data}:
6484@smallexample
6485SECTIONS
6486 @{
6487 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6488 @}
6489@end smallexample
6490@noindent
6491If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6492@samp{.data} section.
6493
7542af2a
AM
6494Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6495particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6496
252b5132
RH
6497@node Builtin Functions
6498@subsection Builtin Functions
6499@cindex functions in expressions
6500The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6501use in linker script expressions.
6502
6503@table @code
6504@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6505@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6506@cindex expression, absolute
6507Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6508of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6509value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6510normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6511
6512@item ADDR(@var{section})
6513@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6514@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6515Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6516script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6517the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6518@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6519@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6520the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6521@smallexample
6522@group
6523SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6524 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6525 @{
252b5132
RH
6526 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6527 @dots{}
6528 @}
6529 .output :
6530 @{
6531 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6532 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6533 @}
6534@dots{} @}
6535@end group
6536@end smallexample
6537
876f4090
NS
6538@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6539@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6540@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6541@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6542@cindex round up location counter
6543@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6544@cindex round up expression
6545@cindex align expression
6546Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6547to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6548doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6549arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6550expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6551equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6552
6553Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6554next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6555variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6556input sections:
252b5132
RH
6557@smallexample
6558@group
6559SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6560 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6561 *(.data)
6562 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6563 @}
6564@dots{} @}
6565@end group
6566@end smallexample
6567@noindent
6568The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6569a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6570a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6571of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6572
6573The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6574
362c1d1a
NS
6575@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6576@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6577@cindex section alignment
6578Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6579been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6580evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6581the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6582value in that section.
6583@smallexample
6584@group
6585SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6586 .output @{
6587 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6588 @dots{}
6589 @}
6590@dots{} @}
6591@end group
6592@end smallexample
6593
252b5132
RH
6594@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6595@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6596This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6597scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6598section.
6599
2d20f7bf
JJ
6600@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6601@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6602This is equivalent to either
6603@smallexample
6604(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6605@end smallexample
6606or
6607@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6608(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6609 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6610@end smallexample
6611@noindent
6612depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6613for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6614@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6615If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6616memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6617bytes in the on-disk file.
6618
6619This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6620any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6621@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6622be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6623running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6624that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6625page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6626
6627@noindent
6628Example:
6629@smallexample
6630 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6631@end smallexample
6632
6633@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6634@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6635This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6636evaluation purposes.
6637
6638@smallexample
6639 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6640@end smallexample
6641
a4f5ad88
JJ
6642@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6643@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6644This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6645@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6646When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6647does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6648@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6649argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6650script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6651@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6652padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6653section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6654
6655@smallexample
6656 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6657@end smallexample
6658
252b5132
RH
6659@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6660@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6661@cindex symbol defaults
6662Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6663defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6664return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6665default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6666shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6667the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6668existed, its value is preserved:
6669
6670@smallexample
6671@group
6672SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6673 .text : @{
6674 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6675 @dots{}
6676 @}
6677 @dots{}
6678@}
6679@end group
6680@end smallexample
6681
3ec57632
NC
6682@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6683@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6684Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6685
252b5132
RH
6686@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6687@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6688@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6689Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6690Section LMA}).
6691
2e53f7d6
NC
6692@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6693@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6694Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6695@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6696
252b5132
RH
6697@kindex MAX
6698@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6699Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6700
6701@kindex MIN
6702@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6703Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6704
6705@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6706@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6707@cindex unallocated address, next
6708Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6709This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6710use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6711output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6712
3ec57632
NC
6713@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6714@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6715Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6716
ba916c8a
MM
6717@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6718@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6719Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6720value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6721@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6722will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6723can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6724``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6725name.
6726
252b5132
RH
6727@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6728@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6729@cindex section size
6730Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6731been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6732evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6733@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6734@smallexample
6735@group
6736SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6737 .output @{
6738 .start = . ;
6739 @dots{}
6740 .end = . ;
6741 @}
6742 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6743 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6744@dots{} @}
6745@end group
6746@end smallexample
6747
6748@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6749@itemx sizeof_headers
6750@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6751@cindex header size
6752Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6753information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6754this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6755choose, to facilitate paging.
6756
6757@cindex not enough room for program headers
6758@cindex program headers, not enough room
6759When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6760@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6761number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6762addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6763additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6764room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6765the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6766script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6767you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6768command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6769@end table
6770
6771@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6772@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6773@cindex implicit linker scripts
6774If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6775an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6776linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6777linker will report an error.
6778
6779An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6780
6781Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6782assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6783commands.
6784
6785Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6786at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6787read. This can affect archive searching.
6788
6789@ifset GENERIC
6790@node Machine Dependent
6791@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6792
6793@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6794@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6795sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6796functionality are not listed.
6797
6798@menu
36f63dca
NC
6799@ifset H8300
6800* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6801@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6802@ifset M68HC11
6803* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6804@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6805@ifset ARM
6806* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6807@end ifset
6808@ifset HPPA
6809* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6810@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6811@ifset M68K
6812* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6813@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6814@ifset MIPS
6815* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6816@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6817@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6818* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6819@end ifset
2469cfa2 6820@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6821* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6822@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6823@ifset NDS32
6824* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6825@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6826@ifset NIOSII
6827* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6828@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6829@ifset POWERPC
6830* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6831@end ifset
6832@ifset POWERPC64
6833* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6834@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6835@ifset S/390
6836* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6837@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6838@ifset SPU
6839* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6840@end ifset
74459f0e 6841@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6842* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6843@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6844@ifset WIN32
6845* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6846@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6847@ifset XTENSA
6848* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6849@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6850@end menu
6851@end ifset
6852
252b5132
RH
6853@ifset H8300
6854@ifclear GENERIC
6855@raisesections
6856@end ifclear
6857
6858@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6859@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6860
6861@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6862For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6863you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6864
6865@table @emph
6866@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6867@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6868@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6869targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6870program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6871respectively.
6872
6873@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6874@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6875@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6876@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6877sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6878page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6879(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6880@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6881top page of memory).
1502569c 6882
81f5558e
NC
6883@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6884indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6885displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6886the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6887@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6888whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6889range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6890
1502569c 6891@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6892@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6893biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6894which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6895page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6896(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6897@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6898the top page of memory).
6899
6900@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6901@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
690232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6903changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6904(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6905@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6906the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6907@end table
6908
6909@ifclear GENERIC
6910@lowersections
6911@end ifclear
6912@end ifset
6913
36f63dca 6914@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6915@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6916@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6917@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6918@node Renesas
6919@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6920
c2dcd04e
NC
6921@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6922H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6923options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6924@end ifset
6925@end ifclear
6926
36f63dca
NC
6927@ifset ARM
6928@ifclear GENERIC
6929@raisesections
6930@end ifclear
6931
93fd0973
SC
6932@ifset M68HC11
6933@ifclear GENERIC
6934@raisesections
6935@end ifclear
6936
6937@node M68HC11/68HC12
6938@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6939
6940@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6941
6942@subsection Linker Relaxation
6943
6944For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6945optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6946
6947@table @emph
6948@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6949@item relaxing address modes
6950@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6951targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6952program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6953respectively.
6954
6955@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6956transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6957page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6958
6959@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6960When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6961of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6962addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6963@code{bset} instructions.
6964
6965@end table
6966
6967@subsection Trampoline Generation
6968
6969@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6970@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6971For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6972call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6973will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6974trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6975case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6976point to the function trampoline.
6977
6978@ifclear GENERIC
6979@lowersections
6980@end ifclear
6981@end ifset
6982
36f63dca 6983@node ARM
3674e28a 6984@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6985
6986@cindex ARM interworking support
6987@kindex --support-old-code
6988For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6989between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6990been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6991line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6992libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6993option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6994given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6995which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6996the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6997non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6998
6999@cindex thumb entry point
7000@cindex entry point, thumb
7001@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
7002The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
7003@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
7004But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
7005branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
7006executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7007
ce11ba6c
KT
7008@cindex PE import table prefixing
7009@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7010The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7011the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 7012element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
7013import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7014
e489d0ae
PB
7015@cindex BE8
7016@kindex --be8
7017The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
7018executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7019objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7020option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7021little-endian code.
e489d0ae 7022
3674e28a
PB
7023@cindex TARGET1
7024@kindex --target1-rel
7025@kindex --target1-abs
7026The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7027@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7028or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7029and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7030
7031@cindex TARGET2
7032@kindex --target2=@var{type}
7033The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7034@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7035meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7036@table @samp
7037@item rel
eeac373a
PB
7038@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7039@item abs
7040@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
7041@item got-rel
7042@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7043@end table
7044
319850b4
JB
7045@cindex FIX_V4BX
7046@kindex --fix-v4bx
7047The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7048specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7049interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7050also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7051
7052In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7053linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7054@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7055
7056In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7057relocations are ignored.
7058
845b51d6
PB
7059@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7060@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7061Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7062relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7063
7064@smallexample
7065TST rM, #1
7066MOVEQ PC, rM
7067BX Rn
7068@end smallexample
7069
7070This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7071and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 7072condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 7073
33bfe774
JB
7074@cindex USE_BLX
7075@kindex --use-blx
7076The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7077BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7078situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7079code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7080each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7081
7082This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7083specify it if you are using that target.
7084
c6dd86c6
JB
7085@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7086@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7087The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7088bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7089instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7090to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7091the support code can read the intended values.
7092
7093The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7094intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7095and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7096intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7097full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7098you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7099
7100If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7101enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7102@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7103mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7104vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7105@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7106
7107If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7108potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7109such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7110first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7111instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7112the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7113are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7114
2de70689
MGD
7115@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7116@kindex --fix-arm1176
7117@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
7118The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7119in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7120are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
7121unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7122
9d5777a3 7123Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 7124Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
7125http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7126
a504d23a
LA
7127@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7128@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7129
7130The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7131workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7132the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7133off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7134the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7135core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7136integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7137VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7138
7139The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7140necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7141
7142The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7143@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7144STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7145linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7146@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7147
7148If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7149potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7150such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7151replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7152branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7153then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7154
7155The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7156the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7157
7158The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7159they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7160there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7161occurs.
7162
7163The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7164PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7165large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7166cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7167occurs.
7168
bf21ed78
MS
7169@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7170@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7171The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7172warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7173enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7174linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7175using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7176not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7177
7178@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7179@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7180The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7181warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7182@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7183linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7184using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7185
726150b7
NC
7186@cindex PIC_VENEER
7187@kindex --pic-veneer
7188The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7189ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7190is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7191@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7192
7193@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7194@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7195The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7196code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7197perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7198placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7199controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7200The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7201duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7202group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7203code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7204where they should be placed.
7205
7206The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7207@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7208placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7209branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7210placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7211value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7212exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7213A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7214linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7215from the input sections.
7216
7217The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7218@samp{N = +1}.
7219
1a51c1a4
NC
7220Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7221only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7222otherwise.
7223
1db37fe6
YG
7224@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7225@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7226@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7227The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7228
7229The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7230
68fcca92
JW
7231@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7232@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7233@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7234The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7235
7236Please contact ARM for further details.
7237
1db37fe6
YG
7238@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7239@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7240@cindex Merging exidx entries
7241The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7242
7243@kindex --long-plt
7244@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7245The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7246which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7247entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7248
1f56df9d
JW
7249@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7250@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7251The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7252link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7253
4ba2ef8f
TP
7254@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7255All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7256Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7257@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7258veneers in memory.
7259
54ddd295
TP
7260@kindex --cmse-implib
7261@cindex Secure gateway import library
7262The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7263specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7264secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7265executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7266
0955507f
TP
7267@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7268@cindex Input import library
7269The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7270must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7271given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7272in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7273@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7274library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7275library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7276for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7277specified.
7278
36f63dca
NC
7279@ifclear GENERIC
7280@lowersections
7281@end ifclear
7282@end ifset
7283
7284@ifset HPPA
7285@ifclear GENERIC
7286@raisesections
7287@end ifclear
7288
7289@node HPPA ELF32
7290@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7291@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7292@kindex --multi-subspace
7293When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7294import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7295The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7296stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7297multiple sub-spaces.
7298
7299@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7300@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7301Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7302stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7303@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7304sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7305a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7306the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7307conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7308prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7309A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7310branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7311@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7312@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7313detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7314positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7315
7316Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7317single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7318create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7319large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7320
7321@ifclear GENERIC
7322@lowersections
7323@end ifclear
7324@end ifset
7325
7fb9f789
NC
7326@ifset M68K
7327@ifclear GENERIC
7328@raisesections
7329@end ifclear
7330
7331@node M68K
7332@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7333
7334@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7335@kindex --got=@var{type}
7336The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7337The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7338@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7339the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7340@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7341entries only at non-negative offsets.
7342@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7343entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7344support such GOTs.
7345@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7346output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7347file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7348files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7349
7350@ifclear GENERIC
7351@lowersections
7352@end ifclear
7353@end ifset
7354
833794fc
MR
7355@ifset MIPS
7356@ifclear GENERIC
7357@raisesections
7358@end ifclear
7359
7360@node MIPS
7361@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7362
7363@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7364@kindex --insn32
7365@kindex --no-insn32
7366The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7367microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7368in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7369used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7370or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7371including 16-bit ones where possible.
7372
8b10b0b3
MR
7373@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7374@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7375@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7376The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7377control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7378@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7379relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7380calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7381relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7382instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7383or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7384the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7385
833794fc
MR
7386@ifclear GENERIC
7387@lowersections
7388@end ifclear
7389@end ifset
7390
36f63dca
NC
7391@ifset MMIX
7392@ifclear GENERIC
7393@raisesections
7394@end ifclear
7395
7396@node MMIX
7397@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7398For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7399@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7400understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7401can translate between the two formats.
7402
7403There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7404Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7405registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7406equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7407@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7408global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7409this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7410symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7411
7a2de473
HPN
7412Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7413@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7414The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7415of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7416
7417Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7418are left out from an mmo file.
7419
7420@ifclear GENERIC
7421@lowersections
7422@end ifclear
7423@end ifset
7424
7425@ifset MSP430
7426@ifclear GENERIC
7427@raisesections
7428@end ifclear
7429
7430@node MSP430
7431@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7432For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7433will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7434just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7435
7436@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7437The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7438
7439@table @code
7440@item @samp{.vectors}
7441Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7442
7443@item @samp{.bootloader}
7444Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7445in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7446
7447@item @samp{.infomem}
7448Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7449this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7450
c0065db7 7451@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7452This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7453in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7454
7455@item @samp{.noinit}
7456Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7457
c0065db7 7458The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7459@end table
7460
7ef3addb
JL
7461@table @option
7462@cindex MSP430 Options
7463@kindex --code-region
7464@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7465This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7466argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7467using this option.
7468
7469@kindex --data-region
7470@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7471This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7472[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7473for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7474
7475@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7476@item --disable-sec-transformation
7477Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7478and @code{--data-region} options.
7479This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7480wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7481not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7482@end table
7483
36f63dca
NC
7484@ifclear GENERIC
7485@lowersections
7486@end ifclear
7487@end ifset
7488
35c08157
KLC
7489@ifset NDS32
7490@ifclear GENERIC
7491@raisesections
7492@end ifclear
7493
7494@node NDS32
7495@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7496@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7497For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7498relaxes objects according to these options.
7499
7500@table @code
7501@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7502Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7503
7504@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7505Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7506
7507@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7508Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7509
7510@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7511Export the EX9 table after linking.
7512
7513@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7514Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7515
7516@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7517Update the existing EX9 table.
7518
7519@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7520Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7521
7522@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7523Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7524
7525@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7526Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7527
7528@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7529Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7530@end table
7531
7532@ifclear GENERIC
7533@lowersections
7534@end ifclear
7535@end ifset
7536
78058a5e
SL
7537@ifset NIOSII
7538@ifclear GENERIC
7539@raisesections
7540@end ifclear
7541
7542@node Nios II
7543@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7544@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7545@kindex --relax on Nios II
7546
7547Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7548transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7549which may result in @command{ld} giving
7550@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7551The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7552trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7553outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7554trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7555be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7556larger than 256MB.
7557
7558The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7559is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7560@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7561locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7562source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7563register as a temporary.
7564
7565Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7566relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7567option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7568
7569@ifclear GENERIC
7570@lowersections
7571@end ifclear
7572@end ifset
7573
2a60a7a8
AM
7574@ifset POWERPC
7575@ifclear GENERIC
7576@raisesections
7577@end ifclear
7578
7579@node PowerPC ELF32
7580@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7581@cindex PowerPC long branches
7582@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7583Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7584displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7585@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7586@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7587the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7588section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7589section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7590@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7591both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7592considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7593
7594@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7595@table @option
7596@cindex PowerPC PLT
7597@kindex --bss-plt
7598@item --bss-plt
7599Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7600generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7601the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7602writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7603@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7604PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7605compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7606BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7607
016687f8
AM
7608@kindex --secure-plt
7609@item --secure-plt
7610@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7611@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7612when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7613layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7614style BSS PLT.
7615
2a60a7a8
AM
7616@cindex PowerPC GOT
7617@kindex --sdata-got
7618@item --sdata-got
7619The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7620sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7621@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7622section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7623@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7624@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7625@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7626@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7627PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7628pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7629GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7630really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7631
7632@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7633@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7634@item --emit-stub-syms
7635This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7636symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7637
7638@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7639@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7640@item --no-tls-optimize
7641PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7642sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7643disable the optimization.
7644@end table
7645
7646@ifclear GENERIC
7647@lowersections
7648@end ifclear
7649@end ifset
7650
7651@ifset POWERPC64
7652@ifclear GENERIC
7653@raisesections
7654@end ifclear
7655
7656@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7657@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7658
7659@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7660@table @option
7661@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7662@kindex --stub-group-size
7663@item --stub-group-size
7664Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7665by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7666@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7667sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7668a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7669the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7670conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7671prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7672A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7673branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7674@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7675@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7676detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7677positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7678
7679Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7680single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7681create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7682large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7683
7684@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7685@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7686@item --emit-stub-syms
7687This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7688symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7689
7690@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7691@kindex --dotsyms
7692@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7693@item --dotsyms
7694@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7695These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7696in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7697function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7698code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7699properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7700to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7701@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7702dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7703feature.
7704
7ae4ea7d
AM
7705@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7706@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7707@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7708@item --save-restore-funcs
7709@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7710These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7711provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7712@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7713function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7714link.
7715
2a60a7a8
AM
7716@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7717@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7718@item --no-tls-optimize
7719PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7720sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7721disable the optimization.
7722
7c9cf415
AM
7723@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7724@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7725@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa
AM
7726@kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7727@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
95421fb9
AM
7728@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7729@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa 7730These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7c9cf415
AM
7731stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7732an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7733@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
9e7028aa
AM
7734stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7735generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7736__tls_get_addr_opt.
7737Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7738much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7739an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7740will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7741@option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7742and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7743this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7744Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
5cebc931 7745@option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
9e7028aa 7746register saves.
7c9cf415 7747
2a60a7a8
AM
7748@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7749@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7750@item --no-opd-optimize
7751PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7752corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7753the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7754Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7755
7756@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7757@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7758@item --non-overlapping-opd
7759Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7760@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7761the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7762entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7763
7764@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7765@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7766@item --no-toc-optimize
7767PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7768entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7769reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7770marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7771marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7772relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7773unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7774reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7775discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7776reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7777code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7778optimization.
7779
7780@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7781@kindex --no-multi-toc
7782@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7783If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7784@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7785where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7786entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7787total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7788grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7789TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7790calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7791help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
779264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7793Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7794
7795@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7796@kindex --no-toc-sort
7797@item --no-toc-sort
7798By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7799happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7800placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7801with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7802referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7803@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7804results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7805off this feature.
7806
7807@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7808@kindex --plt-align
7809@kindex --no-plt-align
7810@item --plt-align
7811@itemx --no-plt-align
7812Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7813aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7814boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7815specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7816specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7817if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7818PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7819
7820@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7821@kindex --plt-static-chain
7822@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7823@item --plt-static-chain
7824@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7825Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7826chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7827chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7828
7829@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7830@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7831@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7832@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7833@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7834With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7835lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7836another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7837order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7838memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7839barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7840looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7841seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7842default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7843
7844@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7845@kindex --plt-localentry
7846@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7847@item --plt-localentry
7848@itemx --no-localentry
7849ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7850ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7851(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7852Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7853or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7854functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7855in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7856interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7857including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7858to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7859complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7860care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7861@end table
7862
7863@ifclear GENERIC
7864@lowersections
7865@end ifclear
7866@end ifset
7867
b4cbbe8f
AK
7868@ifset S/390
7869@ifclear GENERIC
7870@raisesections
7871@end ifclear
7872
7873@node S/390 ELF
7874@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7875
7876@cindex S/390 ELF options
7877@table @option
7878
7879@cindex S/390
7880@kindex --s390-pgste
7881@item --s390-pgste
7882This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7883segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7884binaries marked that way.
7885@end table
7886
7887@ifclear GENERIC
7888@lowersections
7889@end ifclear
7890@end ifset
7891
49fa1e15
AM
7892@ifset SPU
7893@ifclear GENERIC
7894@raisesections
7895@end ifclear
7896
7897@node SPU ELF
7898@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7899
7900@cindex SPU ELF options
7901@table @option
7902
7903@cindex SPU plugins
7904@kindex --plugin
7905@item --plugin
7906This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7907
7908@cindex SPU overlays
7909@kindex --no-overlays
7910@item --no-overlays
7911Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7912regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7913@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7914turns off all this special overlay handling.
7915
7916@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7917@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7918@item --emit-stub-syms
7919This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7920symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7921
7922@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7923@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7924@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7925This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7926function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7927on calls to non-overlay regions.
7928
7929@cindex SPU local store size
7930@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7931@item --local-store=lo:hi
7932@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7933the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7934range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7935
c0065db7 7936@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7937@kindex --stack-analysis
7938@item --stack-analysis
7939SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7940unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7941under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7942@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7943@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7944determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7945for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7946for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7947for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7948find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7949and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7950under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7951dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7952is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7953and calls will be given.
7954
c0065db7 7955@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7956@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7957@item --emit-stack-syms
7958This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7959in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7960These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7961functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7962functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7963such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7964The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7965@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7966@end table
7967
7968@ifclear GENERIC
7969@lowersections
7970@end ifclear
7971@end ifset
7972
36f63dca
NC
7973@ifset TICOFF
7974@ifclear GENERIC
7975@raisesections
7976@end ifclear
7977
7978@node TI COFF
7979@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7980@cindex TI COFF versions
7981@kindex --format=@var{version}
7982The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7983TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7984also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7985format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7986header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7987
7988@ifclear GENERIC
7989@lowersections
7990@end ifclear
7991@end ifset
7992
2ca22b03
NC
7993@ifset WIN32
7994@ifclear GENERIC
7995@raisesections
7996@end ifclear
7997
7998@node WIN32
7999@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
8000
c0065db7 8001This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
8002See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
8003command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
8004
8005@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8006@cindex import libraries
8007@item import libraries
69da35b5 8008The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 8009libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
8010regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8011archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 8012support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 8013@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 8014
c0065db7
RM
8015@item exporting DLL symbols
8016@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
8017The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8018
8019@table @emph
8020@item using auto-export functionality
8021@cindex using auto-export functionality
8022By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 8023which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 8024
0a5d968e
NC
8025@itemize
8026@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8027@item --exclude-symbols
8028@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 8029@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 8030@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
8031@end itemize
8032
09e2aba4
DK
8033When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8034(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8035symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8036often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8037private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 8038options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
8039exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8040final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8041
8042If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
8043command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8044if either of the following are true:
8045
8046@itemize
8047@item A DEF file is used.
8048@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8049@end itemize
dc8465bf 8050
c0065db7
RM
8051@item using a DEF file
8052@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
8053Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8054an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8055exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8056name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 8057command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
8058
8059@example
8060gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8061@end example
8062
0a5d968e
NC
8063Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8064@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8065
dc8465bf
NC
8066Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8067
8068@example
4b5bd4e7 8069LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
8070
8071EXPORTS
8072foo
8073bar
8074_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
8075another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8076var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
8077doo = foo == foo2
8078eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 8079@end example
dc8465bf 8080
7fcab871 8081This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
8082symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8083alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8084by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8085@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
8086@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8087export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8088in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8089symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 8090
6b31ad16
DS
8091The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8092name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8093the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8094
b45619c0
NC
8095When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8096library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 8097@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 8098executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
8099
8100With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8101specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 8102non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
8103
8104If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
8105or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8106filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 8107
4b5bd4e7
DS
8108The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8109
8110@example
8111EXPORTS
8112 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8113 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 8114 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 8115@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
8116
8117Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8118@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8119@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8120@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8121Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
8122@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8123string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
8124
8125The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8126
8127@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8128will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8129by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8130linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8131library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8132
8133@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8134The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8135the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8136@code{*_imp__foo}).
8137
8138@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8139well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8140read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8141variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8142the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8143extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8144application will behave unexpectedly.
8145
8146@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8147it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8148symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8149API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8150the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8151
4b5bd4e7
DS
8152See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8153other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8154
8155@cindex creating a DEF file
8156While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8157with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8158
8159@item Using decorations
8160@cindex Using decorations
8161Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8162itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8163declared as:
8164
8165@example
8166__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8167__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8168@end example
8169
8170All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8171any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8172this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8173the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8174
8175Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8176decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8177instead:
8178
8179@example
8180__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8181__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8182@end example
8183
c0065db7
RM
8184This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8185when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8186variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8187code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8188of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8189omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8190@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8191information.
c0065db7 8192@end table
dc8465bf 8193
2ca22b03
NC
8194@cindex automatic data imports
8195@item automatic data imports
8196The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8197by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8198compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8199issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8200code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8201c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8202initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8203decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8204platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8205command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8206The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8207suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8208trigger the feature's use.
8209
c0065db7 8210auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8211additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8212
c0065db7 8213"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8214documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8215
c0065db7
RM
8216The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8217occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8218One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8219below.
8220
8221@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8222For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8223object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8224offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8225field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8226in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8227without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8228The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8229references.
8230
c0065db7
RM
8231The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8232be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8233themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8234runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8235compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8236support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8237run without error on an older system.
8238
c0065db7
RM
8239@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8240enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8241
8242@cindex direct linking to a dll
8243@item direct linking to a dll
8244The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8245including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8246libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8247traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8248libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8249function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8250though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8251storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8252tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8253large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8254
c0065db7 8255Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8256@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8257of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8258perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8259select the dll instead of an import library.
8260
2ca22b03 8261
69da35b5
NC
8262For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8263to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8264
8265@example
45e948fe
NC
8266libxxx.dll.a
8267xxx.dll.a
8268libxxx.a
8269xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8270libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8271cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8272libxxx.dll
8273xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8274@end example
8275
69da35b5
NC
8276before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8277
c0065db7
RM
8278(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8279where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8280@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8281file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8282@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8283
c0065db7
RM
8284Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8285@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8286was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8287various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8288could coexist on the same machine.
8289
2ca22b03
NC
8290The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8291applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8292libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8293
8294@example
8295bin/
8296 cygxxx.dll
8297lib/
8298 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8299 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8300@end example
8301
c0065db7
RM
8302Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8303done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8304
83051. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8306@example
8307gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8308@end example
2ca22b03 8309
69da35b5
NC
8310However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8311(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8312@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8313not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8314
2ca22b03
NC
83152. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8316directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8317should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8318making the app/dll.
8319
8320@example
8321ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8322@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8323
8324Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8325
8326@example
8327gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8328@end example
69da35b5
NC
8329
8330This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8331perfectly legal
8332
8333@example
8334bin/
8335 cygxxx-5.dll
8336lib/
c0065db7 8337 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8338@end example
8339
dc8465bf 8340Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8341even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8342@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8343
8344Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8345wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8346
83471. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8348work with auto-imported data.
8349
dc8465bf
NC
83502. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8351import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8352symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8353for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8354possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8355
45e948fe
NC
83563. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8357critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8358in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8359stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8360
69da35b5 8361So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8362true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8363a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8364binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8365massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8366requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8367will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8368
c0065db7 8369@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8370@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8371@item adding additional names
8372Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8373A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8374exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8375when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8376import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8377
c0065db7 8378@example
dc8465bf
NC
8379LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8380
8381EXPORTS
c0065db7 8382foo
dc8465bf 8383_foo = foo
c0065db7 8384@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8385
8386The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8387
8388Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8389source code using the "weak" attribute:
8390
c0065db7
RM
8391@example
8392void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8393void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8394@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8395
8396See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8397symbols.
8398
8399@item renaming symbols
8400Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8401kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8402@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8403DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8404created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8405
c0065db7 8406@example
dc8465bf
NC
8407LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8408
8409EXPORTS
8410_foo = foo
c0065db7 8411@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8412
8413The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8414@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8415@end table
dc8465bf 8416
0a5d968e 8417Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8418unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8419If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8420@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8421that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8422@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8423renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8424to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8425the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8426In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8427which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8428
8429@cindex weak externals
8430@item weak externals
8431The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8432weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8433defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8434are three variants of weak externals:
8435@itemize
8436@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8437called lazy externals.
8438@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8439This form is not presently implemented.
8440@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8441implemented.
8442@end itemize
8443As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8444are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8445uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8446
8447@cindex aligned common symbols
8448@item aligned common symbols
8449As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8450desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8451the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8452carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8453by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8454tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8455but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8456warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8457
2ca22b03
NC
8458@end table
8459
8460@ifclear GENERIC
8461@lowersections
8462@end ifclear
8463@end ifset
8464
e0001a05
NC
8465@ifset XTENSA
8466@ifclear GENERIC
8467@raisesections
8468@end ifclear
8469
8470@node Xtensa
8471@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8472
8473@cindex Xtensa processors
8474The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8475@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8476specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8477keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8478example, with the command:
8479
8480@smallexample
8481SECTIONS
8482@{
8483 .text : @{
8484 *(.literal .text)
8485 @}
8486@}
8487@end smallexample
8488
8489@noindent
8490@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8491and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8492literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8493interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8494group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8495files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8496and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8497
43cd72b9 8498@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8499@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8500Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8501provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8502is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8503literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8504will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8505location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8506the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8507unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8508@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8509range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8510
8511For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8512to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8513instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8514instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8515instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8516@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8517hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8518By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8519switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8520density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8521instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8522performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8523linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8524a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8525
8526The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8527control the linker:
8528
8529@cindex Xtensa options
8530@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8531@item --size-opt
8532When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8533more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8534no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8535alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8536preserve the correctness of the code.
8537@end table
e0001a05
NC
8538
8539@ifclear GENERIC
8540@lowersections
8541@end ifclear
8542@end ifset
8543
252b5132
RH
8544@ifclear SingleFormat
8545@node BFD
8546@chapter BFD
8547
8548@cindex back end
8549@cindex object file management
8550@cindex object formats available
8551@kindex objdump -i
8552The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8553These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8554object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8555format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8556it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8557associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8558object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8559(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8560list all the formats available for your configuration.
8561
8562@cindex BFD requirements
8563@cindex requirements for BFD
8564As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8565several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8566BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8567formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8568been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8569BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8570may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8571
8572One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8573mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8574useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8575conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8576
8577@menu
8578* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8579@end menu
8580
8581@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8582@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8583@cindex opening object files
8584@include bfdsumm.texi
8585@end ifclear
8586
8587@node Reporting Bugs
8588@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8589@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8590@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8591
ff5dcc92 8592Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8593
8594Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8595it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8596to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8597work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8598@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8599
8600In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8601information that enables us to fix the bug.
8602
8603@menu
8604* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8605* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8606@end menu
8607
8608@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8609@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8610@cindex bug criteria
8611
8612If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8613
8614@itemize @bullet
8615@cindex fatal signal
8616@cindex linker crash
8617@cindex crash of linker
8618@item
8619If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8620@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8621
8622@cindex error on valid input
8623@item
ff5dcc92 8624If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8625
8626@cindex invalid input
8627@item
ff5dcc92 8628If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8629may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8630object files are correct.
8631
8632@item
8633If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8634improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8635@end itemize
8636
8637@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8638@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8639@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8640@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8641
8642A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8643products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8644recommend you contact that organization first.
8645
8646You can find contact information for many support companies and
8647individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8648distribution.
8649
ad22bfe8 8650@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8651Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8652@value{BUGURL}.
8653@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8654
8655The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8656@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8657fact or leave it out, state it!
8658
8659Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8660problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8661assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8662matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8663the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8664location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8665were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8666into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8667specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8668and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8669
8670Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8671the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8672on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8673
8674Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8675bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8676respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8677You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8678
8679To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8680
8681@itemize @bullet
8682@item
ff5dcc92 8683The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8684the @samp{--version} argument.
8685
8686Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8687the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8688
8689@item
ff5dcc92 8690Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8691patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8692
8693@item
8694The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8695version number.
8696
8697@item
ff5dcc92 8698What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8699``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8700
8701@item
8702The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8703observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8704list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8705sufficient.
8706
8707If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8708and then we might not encounter the bug.
8709
8710@item
8711A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8712bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8713provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8714bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8715state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8716requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8717we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8718attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8719
8720If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8721@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8722object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8723@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8724how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8725
8726@item
8727A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8728incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8729
ff5dcc92 8730Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8731will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8732not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8733a chance to make a mistake.
8734
8735Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8736say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8737copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8738C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8739and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8740fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8741you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8742any conclusion from our observations.
8743
8744@item
ff5dcc92 8745If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8746diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8747@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8748If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8749context, not by line number.
8750
8751The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8752sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8753@end itemize
8754
8755Here are some things that are not necessary:
8756
8757@itemize @bullet
8758@item
8759A description of the envelope of the bug.
8760
8761Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8762which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8763changes will not affect it.
8764
8765This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8766will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8767with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8768We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8769
8770Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8771of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8772output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8773less time, and so on.
8774
8775However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8776report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8777
8778@item
8779A patch for the bug.
8780
8781A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8782the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8783a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8784to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8785
ff5dcc92 8786Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8787construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8788through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8789able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8790fixed.
8791
8792And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8793patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8794help us to understand.
8795
8796@item
8797A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8798
8799Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8800things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8801@end itemize
8802
8803@node MRI
8804@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8805@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8806To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8807linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8808alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8809described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8810simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8811@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8812linker commands; these commands are described here.
8813
8814In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8815file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8816features to make use of them.
8817
8818You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8819@samp{-c} command-line option.
8820
8821Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8822command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8823blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8824MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8825issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8826
8827Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8828
8829You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8830lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8831The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8832
8833@table @code
8834@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8835@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8836@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8837Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8838the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8839@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8840your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8841script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8842commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8843input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8844@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8845
8846@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8847@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8848Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8849in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8850
8851@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8852
8853@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8854@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8855Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8856@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8857
8858@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8859@item BASE @var{expression}
8860Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8861absolute addresses) in the output file.
8862
8863@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8864@item CHIP @var{expression}
8865@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8866This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8867
8868@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8869@item END
8870This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8871
8872@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8873@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8874Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8875language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8876
8877@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8878@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8879Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8880@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8881
8882The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8883same line, with no change in its effect.
8884
8885@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8886@item LOAD @var{filename}
8887@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8888Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8889same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8890command line.
8891
8892@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8893@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8894@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8895MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8896option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8897
8898@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8899@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8900@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8901Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8902order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8903script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8904sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8905file, in the order specified.
8906
8907@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8908@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8909@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8910@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8911Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8912@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8913
8914@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8915@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8916@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8917@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8918You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8919specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8920If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8921@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8922@end table
8923
793c5807
NC
8924@node GNU Free Documentation License
8925@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8926@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8927
370b66a1
CD
8928@node LD Index
8929@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8930
8931@printindex cp
8932
8933@tex
7ca01ed9 8934% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8935% meantime:
8936\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8937\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8938\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8939\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8940\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8941\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8942\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8943\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8944\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8945% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8946@end tex
8947
252b5132 8948@bye
This page took 1.498935 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.